SERVICE HANDBOOK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO350/450 e-STUDIO352/452 e-STUDIO353/453
Model: DP-3520/3540/4520/4540 Publish Date: November 2003 File No. SHE030005Q0 R03092141302-TTEC Ver17_2007-11
Trademarks • • • • • •
• • • • •
The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective companies.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
07/06
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453 The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1) Transportation / Installation - When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 83kg (182.98 lb.): e-STUDIO350/450 / 86kg (189.59 lb.): e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 therefore pay fullattention when handling it.
-
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment. Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/13.2A, 115V or 127V / 12A, 220-240V or 240V / 8A for its power source. The equipment must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.
07/11
2) Service of Machines - Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. - Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the damp heater and their periphery. - Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. - Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. - Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. - When servicing the machines with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. - Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. - Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. Avoid direct exposure to the beam.Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam.Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. - Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. - Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause malfunctions. 3) Main Service Parts for Safety - The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4) Cautionary Labels - During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment. 5) Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and IC-RAMs - Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules. 6) When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places. 7) Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. 8) Precautions Against Static Electricity - The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
07/06
Caution: Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual. Attention: Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel. Vorsicht: Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
06/09
CONTENTS e-STUDIO350/450
1. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES .................................. 1-1 1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.3.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-5 1.3.2 e-STUDIO352/452.................................................................................................... 1-6 1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.5 System List .......................................................................................................................... 1-9 1.5.1 e-STUDIO350/450.................................................................................................... 1-9 1.5.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453.................................................................................... 1-10
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1 2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-7 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-13 2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-22 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-25 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)................................................... 2-27 2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)..................................... 2-34 2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-42 2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-45 2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450) ........................................................... 2-46 2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................................. 2-64 2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450).................................................................. 2-82 2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453).................................................. 2-144 2.2.9 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-243 2.2.10 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................................................................. 2-251 2.2.11 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................................................................... 2-258
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-7 3.2.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-12 3.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-21 3.3.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-21 3.3.2 Gamma slope adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-22 3.3.3 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-22 3.3.4 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-23 3.3.5 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-23 3.3.6 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-24 3.3.7 Gamma balance adjustment < e-STUDIO 352/353/452/453 > .............................. 3-24 3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-25 3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-25 3.4.2 Adjustment of image density .................................................................................. 3-25 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-26 3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-26 3.5.2 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-27 © 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS
1 05/12
3.6
3.7
3.8 3.9 3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15 3.16
3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-28 3.5.4 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-28 Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer .......................................................................... 3-29 3.6.1 Adjustment ............................................................................................................. 3-29 3.6.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................ 3-38 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-40 3.7.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-40 3.7.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-45 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-48 3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-48 Adjustment of Developer Unit ............................................................................................ 3-49 3.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap .............................................................................................. 3-49 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015).................................................................................. 3-52 3.10.1 Adjustment of RADF position ................................................................................. 3-52 3.10.2 Adjustment of RADF height .................................................................................... 3-57 3.10.3 Adjustment of skew ................................................................................................ 3-59 3.10.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ............................ 3-60 3.10.5 Adjustment of aligning ............................................................................................ 3-61 3.10.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing ........................................................................ 3-62 3.10.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .............................................................................. 3-63 3.10.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch.......................................................... 3-65 3.10.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor ......................................................... 3-66 3.10.10Adjustment of tray volume ..................................................................................... 3-67 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018).................................................................................. 3-68 3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF Position ................................................................................. 3-68 3.11.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ................................................................................... 3-73 3.11.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................ 3-75 3.11.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position .............................................................. 3-78 3.11.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position .......................................................................... 3-79 3.11.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio....................................................................................... 3-81 3.11.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor....................................................... 3-82 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................ 3-83 3.12.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ............................................................................ 3-83 3.12.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ................................................................. 3-85 3.12.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ................................................................. 3-86 3.12.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ....................................... 3-87 3.12.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate .................................................... 3-89 3.12.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................ 3-90 3.12.7 DIP switch functions ............................................................................................... 3-92 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)....................................................................... 3-93 3.13.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)...................................................... 3-93 3.13.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)............................................................ 3-94 3.13.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)................................................ 3-96 3.13.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) .......................... 3-98 3.13.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) ............................................................... 3-99 3.13.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-100 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1101).............................................................................. 3-101 3.14.1 Adjusting the Alignment Position .......................................................................... 3-101 3.14.2 Adjusting the Stapling Position ............................................................................. 3-103 3.14.3 B4-size recycled paper mode settings ................................................................. 3-105 3.14.4 Stopping Position Adjustment (MJ-6101:Puncher unit) ........................................ 3-107 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) .................................................................................. 3-109 Adjustment of Dogleg ...................................................................................................... 3-111
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1 4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1 e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 06/01
4.2
4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9
4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-6 General Descriptions for PM Procedure (Maintenance Performed Every 120,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 150,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)) .................................................................................................... 4-7 Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-8 Cleaning the Units which Have Processed 60,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO350/352/353) and 75,000 Output Pages (e-STUDIO450/452/453)............................................................ 4-9 Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-10 PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-29 Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-30 Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-31 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-32 4.9.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-32 4.9.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-33 4.9.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade...................................................... 4-34 4.9.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ...................................... 4-34 4.9.5 Checking and replacing the cleaning roller ............................................................ 4-35
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 5-14 5.1.3 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-21 5.1.4 Transport jam (RADF) ............................................................................................ 5-26 5.1.5 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-32 5.1.6 Drive system related service call ............................................................................ 5-56 5.1.7 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-57 5.1.8 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-63 5.1.9 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-65 5.1.10 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-69 5.1.11 RADF related service call (MR-3015)..................................................................... 5-70 5.1.12 RADF related service call (MR-3018)..................................................................... 5-71 5.1.13 Laser optical unit related service call (MR-3018) ................................................... 5-71 5.1.14 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-72 5.1.15 Service call for others ............................................................................................. 5-91 5.1.16 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 5-94 5.1.17 Image control related service call ......................................................................... 5-108 5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-109 5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-131 5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-131 5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-134 5.3.3 Caution when Data overwrite kit (GP-1050/1060) is installed ............................. 5-136 5.3.4 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-136 5.3.5 Replacing or clearing NVRAM.............................................................................. 5-139
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO350/450) ............................................... 6-3 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ............................................................................. 6-5 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) .......................................................................... 6-11 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) .............................. 6-20 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-22 6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ............................... 6-34 6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ........................................................................... 6-36 6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-50 © 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS
3 07/06
6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
6.2.3 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-52 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) (e-STUDIO350/450) ................ 6-66 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450).................................. 6-79 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453).................... 6-91 Appendix.......................................................................................................................... 6-115 6.6.1 e-STUDIO350/450................................................................................................ 6-115 6.6.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453.................................................................................. 6-116
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-4
8.
REMOTE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2 8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-11 8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-13 8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.2 Setting (e-STUDIO350/450) ................................................................................... 8-13 8.2.3 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO350/450) ................................................................ 8-18 8.2.4 Setting (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) ..................................................................... 8-23 8.2.5 Items to be notified (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .................................................. 8-29
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) .......... 9-1 10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5
AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)...................................................................... Appendix Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450) ....................................................................... Appendix DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO352/452)...................................................................... Appendix Connector Table (e-STUDIO352/452) ....................................................................... Appendix
e-STUDIO350/450 CONTENTS
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4 05/11
1.
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1.1
1
Specifications
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO450/452/453 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO350/ 352/353 and e-STUDIO450/452/453.
• •
Copy process Type
• •
Original table Accepted originals
•
Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) Desktop type (console type: when paper feed pedestal (PFP) and large capacity feeder (LCF) are installed) Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled. Carbon paper are not acceptable either. Maximum size: A3/LD Single - sided originals
Double - sided originals
MR-3015
50 to 127 g/m2 (13 lb. Bond to 34 lb. Bond)
50 to 105 g/m2 (13 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
MR-3018
35 to 157 g/m2 50 to 157 g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover) (13 lb. Bond to 58 lb. Cover)
Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO350/352/353 Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD
Drawer 35 25 21 18
Paper supply Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 35 18 25 18 21 18
18 18
PFP
LCF
35 25
35 -
21 18
-
PFP
LCF
45 28
45 -
24 21
-
e-STUDIO450/452/453 Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD
* * *
Drawer 45 28 24 21
Paper supply Bypass feed Size not Size specified specified 40 21 28 21 24 21
21 21
“–” means “Not acceptable”. The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side, multiple copying. When the RADF is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions: • Original/Mode: Single side original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected. • Number of sheets: 35[45] or more. • Paper feeding: LCF • Reproduction ratio: 100%
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-1 07/11
*
System copy speed Sec.
Copy mode Single-sided originals ↓ Single-sided copies Single-sided originals ↓ Double-sided copies Double-sided originals ↓ Double-sided copies Double-sided originals ↓ Single-sided copies
*
1 set
e-STUDIO350/352/353 20.85
e-STUDIO450/452/453 17.49
3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets
57.95 91.20 27.42 62.18 97.55 55.47 126.21 196.93 48.22 117.44 184.96
46.68 73.50 25.71 57.41 89.03 54.68 118.07 181.36 48.20 102.18 155.06
* * *
The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the left table is selected. The period of time from pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured value. Upper drawer is selected and copying is at the non-sort mode. Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off. Finisher is not installed.
•
Copy paper Drawer Size
Weight
Special paper
ADU
PFP
A3 to A5-R LD to ST-R
LCF
Bypass copy
A4, LT
A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.)
g/m2
64 to 105 17 to 28 lb.
-
64 to 209 g/m2, 17 to 55 lb.(Continuous feeding) 50 to 209 g/m2, 13 to 55 lb. (Single paper feeding) Tracing paper, labels, OHP film (thickness: 80µm or thicker)
Remarks
These special paper recommended by Toshiba Tec
y First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO350/352/353: Approx. 3.9sec. or less e-STUDIO450/452/453: Approx. 3.9sec. or less (A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually) y Warming-up time .................. Approx. 20 seconds (temperature: 20°C) y Multiple copying.................... Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers y Reproduction ratio ................ Actual ratio: 100±0.5% Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1% (25 to 200% when using RADF) y Resolution/Gradation............ Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Gradation: 256 steps y Eliminated portion................. Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (copy) Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (print) e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-2 07/11
y Paper feeding ....................... Automatic feeding: Standard drawers–2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.)) PFP–Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.)) LCF–Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 22 lb.)) Bypass feeding: (Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22 lb.)) y Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option) .................................................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets / 80 g/m2 (Stack height 16 mm or less) y Automatic duplexing unit ...... Stackless, Switchback type y Toner supply ......................... Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method y Density control...................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps y Weight .................................. 83 kg, 183 lb. (e-STUDIO350/450) 86 kg, 189.59 lb. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) y Power requirements ............. AC 110 V (±10%) / 13.2 A, 115 V (±10%) or 127 V (±10%) / 12 A 220-240 V (±10%) or 240 V (±10%) / 8 A y Power consumption.............. 1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series) * The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. y Total counter......................... Electronical counter y Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below W660 x D718 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO350/450) W660 x D758 x H739 mm (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453) y When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees. D
45˚
H
W
Fig. 1-1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-3 07/11
1
1.2
Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction Operator’s manual Operator's manual pocket Power cable Warranty sheet Setup report PM sticker Drum (installed inside of the equipment) Toner bag Toner cartridge Developer material Operation panel stopper Blind seal Rubber plug CD-ROM Platen cover
*
1 set 4 pcs. (except for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for NAD) 1 set (for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (except for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. 1 pcs 4 pcs. 4 pcs. 1 pc. (for CND)
Machine version NAD: North America MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Central and South America / Hong Kong / Asia TWD: Taiwan SAD Saudi Arabia JPD: Japan CND: China ASU: Asia KRD: Korea
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-4 05/11
1.3 1.3.1
Options 1
e-STUDIO350/450
Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) Finisher (Console type) Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) Hole punch unit Staple cartridge
Bridge kit Job Separator Offset Tray Key Copy Counter Work Tray Damp Heater Fax Board 2nd Line for Fax Board Wireless LAN Adapter PCI slot Scrambler board Printer Kit Printer/Scanner Kit Scanner upgrade Kit Desk Data overwrite kit *
1) N: North America
E: Europe
KA-3511PC/PC-C MR-3015 MY-1021/-C KD-1011/-C KD-1012 A4/LT/A4-C MJ-1022/-C MJ-1023/-C MJ-1024/-C MJ-6004 N/E/F/S *1 STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022) STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024) STAPLE-600 (for MJ-1024) KN-3520/-C MJ-5004/-C MJ-5005/-C MU-8, MU-10 KK-3511 MF-3520 U/E GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/TW/C/AS GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C GN-1010 GO-1030 GP-1030 GM-1010 GM-2010 GM-3010 MH-1700 GP-1050
F: France
S: Sweden
Notes: 1. The bridge unit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-1024). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030).
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-5 05/11
1.3.2
e-STUDIO352/452
Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) : e-STUDIO352 only Finisher (Console type) Finisher (Console type) Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) Hole punch unit (for MJ-1101) Hole punch unit (for MJ-1023/1024) Staple cartridge
Bridge kit Job Separator Offset Tray Work Tray Damp Heater Fax Board 2nd Line for Fax Board Printer Kit Printer/Scanner Kit Scanner Kit Printer ELK Printer/Scanner ELK Scanner ELK Memory Scrambler board Wireless LAN module Bluetooth module Antenna Data overwrite kit PCI slot Desk Harness kit for coin controller
KA-3511PC MR-3018 MY-1021/-C KD-1011/-C KD-1012 LT/A4/A4-C MJ-1022/-C MJ-1101 MJ-1023/-C MJ-1024/-C MJ-6101 N/E/F/S MJ-6004 N/E/F/S STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022) STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101) STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024) KN-3520/-C MJ-5004/-C MJ-5005/-C KK-3511 MF-3520 U/E GD-1200 NA/EU/AU/AS/C/TW/KR GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW GM-1060/1061 GM-2060/2061 GM-4060 GM-1120 GM-2120 GM-4120 GC-1230 GP-1040 GN-1041 GN-2010 GN-3010 GP-1060 GO-1060 MH-1700 GQ-1020
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-6 07/11
Notes: 1. The bridge kit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023/1024 or MJ-1101). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023/1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/ F/S). The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6101N/E/ F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040). 4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and Bluetooth module (GN-2010). 5. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1041) and the Bluetooth module (GN-2010) are installed, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each. 6. The Printer kit (GM-1060) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060) does not have a function for printing an XPS file. 7. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer kit (GM-1061) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM2061), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed. 8. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer ELK (GM-1120) or Printer/Scanner ELK (GM-2120), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1-7 07/11
1
1.4
Supplies
Drum Toner bag Toner cartridge Developer
* *
2) N: Asia 3) T: Taiwan
OD-3500 PS-TB3520 /E/N *2 PS-ZT3520 /T/D/C/E *3 (e-STUDIO350/352/450/452) PS-ZT3520C *3, PS-ZT4520 /E *3 (e-STUDIO353/453) D-3500
E: Europe D: Asia
NONE: North America C: China E: Europe
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
NONE: North America
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-8 07/11
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-9
05/11
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-600
Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) MJ-1024
Finisher (Console type) MJ-1023
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2000
2nd Line for FAX Board GD-1160 NA/EU/TW/C
FAX Board GD-1150 NA/AU/EU/ TW/C/AS
Drawer Module MY-1021
PCI Slot GO-1030
Offset Tray MJ-5005
Job Separator MJ-5004
Scrambler Board GP-1030
Hole Punch Unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Bridge Kit KN-3520
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011
Wireless LAN Adapter GN-1010
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012 A4/LT
Platen Cover KA-3511
Desk MH-1700
Scanner Upgrade Kit GM-3010
Printer/ Scanner Kit GM-2010
Printer Kit GM-1010
Data overwrite kit GP-1050
Damp Heater MF-3520 U/E
Key Copy Counter MU-8, MU-10
Work Tray KK-3511
1.5.1
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-1600
Finisher (Hanging type) MJ-1022
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3015
1.5 System List
e-STUDIO350/450 1
Fig. 1-2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1 - 10
07/11
Finisher (Console type) MJ-1101
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2400
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-600
Finisher (Console saddle stitcher type) MJ-1024
Finisher (Console type) MJ-1023
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-2000
Staple Cartridge STAPLE-1600
Finisher (Hanging type) MJ-1022
Hole Punch Unit MJ-6101 N/E/F/S
2nd Line for FAX Board GD-1160 NA/EU-N/TW/C
FAX Board GD-1200 NA/EU/AU/AS/ C/TW/KR
Drawer Module MY-1021
Scrambler Board GP-1040
Offset Tray MJ-5005
Job Separator MJ-5004
Bridge Kit KN-3520
Damp Heater MF-3520 U/E
Hole Punch Unit MJ-6004 N/E/F/S
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011
PCI Slot GO-1060
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3018
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012 A4/LT
Platen Cover KA-3511
Desk MH-1700
Memory GC-1230
Data Overwrite Kit GP-1060
Printer/ Scanner Kit.ELK GM-2060/2061 GM-2120 Scanner Kit.ELK GM-4060 GM-4120
Printer Kit.ELK GM-1060/1061 GM-1120
Antenna GN-3010
Bluetooth Module GN-2010
Wireless LAN Module GN-1041
Work Tray KK-3511
1.5.2 e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Fig. 1-3
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2.
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1
Error Code List
One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALLSERVICE” symbol is blinking.
2.1.1
Jam
Error code E010
Classification Paper exit jam
E020
E030
Other paper jam
E061
E062
E063
E064
E065
E090 E110
E120
E130
E140
E150
Paper misfeeding
Contents Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which has passed through the fuser unit does not reach the exit sensor. Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is turned ON. Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer: The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer: The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size setting of the equipment. HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be printed cannot be prepared. ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the registration sensor. Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting P. 5-1
P. 5-1
P. 5-2 P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-2
P. 5-3 P. 5-14
P. 5-15
P. 5-16
P. 5-17
P. 5-18
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-1 06/06
2
Error code E160
Classification Paper misfeeding
E190
E200
Paper transport jam
E210
E220
E300
E310
E320
E330
E340
E350
E360
E3C0
E3D0
Contents
Troubleshooting
PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor. Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-19
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
P. 5-3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-20
P. 5-3
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-5
P. 5-3
P. 5-4
P. 5-5
P. 5-6
P. 5-4
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-2
Error code
Classification
E3E0
Paper transport jam
E400
Cover open jam
E410 E420 E430 E440 E450 E480 E490 E491 E510
Paper transport jam (ADU section)
E520
E550
Other paper jam
E711
RADF jam
E712
E713
E714
E721
E722
E723
Contents
Troubleshooting
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the LCF feed sensor. Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during printing. Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing. PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has opened during printing. The ADU has opened during printing. Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened during printing. LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has opened during printing. Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened during printing. Job separator cover open jam: The job separator cover has opened during printing. Offset tray cover open jam: The offset tray cover has opened during printing. Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor. Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in the exit section. Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding). Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the original length sensor.
P. 5-5
Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the registration sensor. Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original length sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received even no original exists on the original feeding tray. Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original does not reach the read sensor after it has passed the registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse side). Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section. Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-21 P. 5-21 P. 5-22 P. 5-22 P. 5-23 P. 5-23 P. 5-24 P. 5-24 P. 5-25 P. 5-7
P. 5-8
P. 5-9
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-26
P. 5-27
P. 5-27
P. 5-27
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-3
2
Error code E724
Classification RADF jam
E725
E726
E731
E741
E742
E743
E860 E870 E910
Finisher jam (Bridge unit)
E920
E930
E940
E950
Job separator jam
E951
E960
Offset tray jam
E961
Contents
Troubleshooting
Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives the transport/exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the exposure waiting position. Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the reversal sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original does not reach the reverse sensor when original is fed from the reverse section.
P. 5-28
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reverse sensor when the original is exited from the reverse section. Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has opened during RADF operation. RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF operation. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
P. 5-30
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-1: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor-1 after its leading edge has reached the sensor. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor-1. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor-2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor-2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport sensor-2. Jam not reaching the job separator transport switch: The paper has passed through the exit sensor does not reach the job separator transport switch. Stop jam at the job separator transport switch: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the job separator transport switch. Jam not reaching the offset tray transport switch: The paper has passed through the exit sensor does not reach the offset tray transport switch. Stop jam at the offset tray transport switch: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the offset tray transport switch.
P. 5-32
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-28
P. 5-28
P. 5-29
P. 5-29
P. 5-30
P. 5-30 P. 5-31 P. 5-32
P. 5-32
P. 5-32
P. 5-10
P. 5-10
P. 5-10
P. 5-10
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-4 06/01
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
E9F0
Finisher jam (Puncher unit)
P. 5-50
EA10
Finisher jam (Finisher unit)
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101] Paper transport stop jam: (1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor. [MJ-1023/1024] (3) The paper which has passed through the inlet sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ1101] Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the sensor because the paper is shorter than spec. [MJ1101] Power-ON jam: (1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024]
EA31
Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper which has passed through the inlet sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-38
EA32
Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1101] Door open jam: (1) The finisher has been released from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022] (2) The upper/front cover of the finisher unit or the upper/front door of the puncher unit has opened during printing. [MJ-1023/1024] (3) The front cover or stationary tray cover is opened during paper transport. [MJ-1101] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.[MJ-1022/1023/1024/1101] Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/ 1024/1101] Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack tray. [MJ-1022] Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1024] Door open jam: The delivery cover or the inlet cover has opened during printing [MJ-1024]. Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-38
EA20
EA21
EA30
EA40
EA50 EA60
EA70
EA80 EA90 EAA0
Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher unit)
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-33
P. 5-35
P. 5-36
P. 5-37
P. 5-39
P. 5-42 P. 5-44
P. 5-45
P. 5-47 P. 5-47 P. 5-48
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-5 06/01
2
Error code EAB0
Classification Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher unit)
EAC0
EAD0
Other paper jam
EAE0
Finisher jam
EAF0
Finisher jam (Finisher unit)
EB30
Finisher jam
EB50
Paper transport jam
EB60
ED10
Finisher (Puncher unit)
ED11
ED12
Finisher
ED13
ED14
ED15 ED16
Contents
Troubleshooting
Transport stop jam: The paper which passed through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024] Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024] Print end command time-out jam: The printing has not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board at the end of printing. Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been interrupted because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment to the finisher. Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which passed through the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022] Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
P. 5-48
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is detected at [EB50]). Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
P. 5-11
Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Front alignment plate home position error: The front alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-49
P. 5-51
P. 5-51
P. 5-46
P. 5-51
P. 5-13
P. 5-52
P. 5-52
P. 5-53 P. 5-53
P. 5-54
P. 5-54 P. 5-55
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-6 07/11
2.1.2
Service call
Error code C010 C040
Classification Drive system related service call Paper feeding system related service call
C130
C140
C150
C160
C180
C1A0
C1B0
C260
Scanning system related service call
C270
C280
C410
C440
Fuser unit related service call
Contents Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not rotating normally. PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP) Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the upper drawer) Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the lower drawer) PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP upper drawer) PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer) LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp (white reference) is not detected when power is turned ON. Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time: The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified period of time. Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time: The carriage does not reach to its home position in a specified period of time. Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: Abnormality of service call the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified period of time after power is turned ON. Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the range of control (in this case, the main switch turns OFF automatically) or does not even reach the range.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting P. 5-56 P. 5-57
2 P. 5-58
P. 5-58
P. 5-59
P. 5-59
P. 5-60
P. 5-61
P. 5-62
P. 5-63
P. 5-64
P. 5-64
P. 5-65
P. 5-66
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-7
Error code
Classification
C450
Fuser unit related service call
C470
C480 C490
C550 (C780) C570 C580 C730 C740 C810 C820
C830
C940 C970 CA10 CA20 CB00 CB01 CB10 CB11
CB12
Contents
Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected during printing. IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality: The AC input is not applied to the IH control circuit normally, or the input voltage is too high/low. Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT rises abnormally. IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/ shorted. Optional communicaRADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner. Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and finisher RADF related EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialservice call ized normally when performing the code 05-356. Reverse sensor adjustment error Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally. Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Circuit related service Engine-CPU abnormality call Process related serHigh-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of vice call the main charger is detected. Laser optical unit Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor related service call is not rotating normally. H-Sync detection error: H-Sync detection PC board cannot detect laser beams. Finisher related Finisher not connected: The finisher is not conservice call nected. Finisher communication error: Communication error has occurred between the equipment and finisher. Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1101] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-66 P. 5-67
P. 5-68 P. 5-68
P. 5-69 P. 5-69 P. 5-69 P. 5-70 P. 5-70 P. 5-70 P. 5-70
P. 5-70
P. 5-91 P. 5-91 P. 5-71 P. 5-71 P. 5-72 P. 5-72
P. 5-72
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-8 06/06
Error code CB20 CB30
CB31
CB40
CB50
CB51 CB60
CB80
CB81
CB90
CBA0
CBB0
CBC0
CBD0 CBE0
Classification Finisher related service call
Contents
Troubleshooting
Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022] Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Movable tray paper-full detection error: The actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection sensor does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Front alignment motor abnormality: The front alignment motor is not rotating or the front alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/ 1023/1024] Stapler home position error: The stapler home position sensor does not work. [MJ-1101] Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not at the home position. [MJ-1101] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality: The stapler unit shift motor is not rotating or the stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024/1101] Backup RAM data abnormality: (1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1023/1024] (2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch driver board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] RAM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101] Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1024]
P. 5-72
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-73
2 P. 5-74
P. 5-74
P. 5-75
P. 5-75 P. 5-76
P. 5-76
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-77
P. 5-78 P. 5-78
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-9 06/01
Error code CBF0
Classification Finisher related service call
CC00
CC10
CC20
CC30
CC31
CC40
CC41
CC50
CC51
CC52
CC60
CC61
CC71
CC72
Contents
Troubleshooting
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor or paper pushing plate top position sensor is disconnected. [MJ- 1024] Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed, inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover switch is open. [MJ-1024] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller board and saddle stitcher controller board [MJ-1023/1024] Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
P. 5-78
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/ 1024] Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ1101] Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ6004 is installed)] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality: Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed) Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/ 1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]
P. 5-81
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-79
P. 5-80
P. 5-81
P. 5-82
P. 5-82
P. 5-82
P. 5-83
P. 5-83
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
P. 5-84
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 10 06/01
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear alignment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ1023/1024]
P. 5-85
CCF0
Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
P. 5-88
CDE0
Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ1101] Initialization error of the offset tray: The home position of the separator cannot be detected when the power is turned ON. Communication error between finisher unit and puncher unit: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range.
P. 5-89
CC80
Classification Finisher related service call
CC90
CCA0
CCB0
CCD0
CCE0
CDF0
Offset tray related service call
CE00
Finisher related service call
CE50
Image control related service call
CF10
Finisher related service call
F070
Communication related service call Other service call
F090 F091 F092 F100 F101 F102 F103
Undefined error code processing: If the engine of the equipment judges that a code (command) other than the defined error codes is sent from the finisher, it regards this as a CF10 error. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Communication module SRAM writing failure. [MJ-1101] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU SRAM abnormality on the SYS board NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally. HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected. HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state. HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified period of time.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-86
P. 5-87
P. 5-87
P. 5-88
P. 5-88
P. 5-91
P. 5-89
P. 5-108 P. 5-90
P. 5-69 P. 5-91 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-92
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 11 07/06
2
Error code F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F110 F111 F120
Classification Other service call
Communication related service call Other service call
F130 F200
Contents HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD. HDD other error Point and Print partition damage /SHR partition damage /SHA partition damage Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Scanner response abnormality Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally. Invalid MAC address Data overwrite Kit (GP-1050/1060) is taken off
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-92 P. 5-92 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-69 P. 5-69 P. 5-93 P. 5-93 P. 5-93
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 12 05/11
2.1.3
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed) Error code 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C20 1C21 1C22 1C30 1C31 1C32 1C33 1C40 1C60
Classification
Troubleshooting P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-94 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-94 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95
System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality HDD full failure during processing
1C61 1C62 1C63 1C64 1C65 1C66
Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error
P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-95
1C67 1C68 1C69 1C6A 1C6B 1C6C 1C6D 1C70 1C71 1C72 1C80 1C81 1C82 1CC0 1CC1
NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Onramp Gateway transmission failure Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Job canceling Power failure
P. 5-95 P. 5-95 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-95 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96 P. 5-96
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 13 07/11
2
2) RFC related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed) Error code 2500
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Syntax error, command unrecognized
2501
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
2503
Bad sequence of commands
2504 2550
Command parameter not implemented Mailbox unavailable
2551
User not local
2552
Insufficient system storage
2553
Mailbox name not allowed
Contents HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) HOST NAME error (RFC: 504) Destination mail address error (RFC: 550) Destination mail address error (RFC: 551) Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552) Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-97
P. 5-97
P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97 P. 5-97
P. 5-97
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 14 07/11
3) Electronic Filing related error Error code 2B10 2B11 2B20 2B21 2B30 2B31
2B32
2B50 2B51 2B60 2B70
2B71 2B80 2B90 2BA0 2BA1
2BB0 2BB1 2BC0 2BC1 2BD0 2BE0 2BF0 2BF1 2BF2
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen There was no applicable job.
Contents
No applicable job error in job control module Job status failed. JOB status abnormality Failed to access file. File library function error Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity imum size Insufficient disk space. Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition Failed to access Electronic Filing. Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted Failed to print Electronic Filing docu- Electronic Filing printing failure: ment. Specified document can not be printed because of client’s access (being edited, etc.). Failed to process image. Image library error Failed to process print image. List library error The folder was renamed. A folder of A folder with the same name exists in the same name already existed. the box. The document was renamed. A doc- A document with the same name ument of the same name already exists in the box or folder. existed. Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Documents expiring in a few days exist Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Hard disk space in /SHR partition is nearly full. nearly full (90%). Insufficient Memory. Insufficient memory capacity Invalid Box password specified. Invalid Box password Incorrect paper size A Paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected. Job canceled Job canceling Power failure occurred Power failure System fatal error. Fatal failure occurred Failed to acquire resource. System management module resource acquiring failure Power failure occurred during e-FilPower failure occurred during restoring restoring. ing of Electronic Filing Failed to get machine parameter. Machine parameter reading failure Maximum number of page range is Exceeding maximum number of reached. pages Maximum number of document Exceeding maximum number of docrange is reached. uments Maximum number of folder range is Exceeding maximum number of foldreached. ers
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-98
P. 5-98
P. 5-98 P. 5-98 -
P. 5-98 P. 5-99 P. 5-99
P. 5-99 P. 5-98 P. 5-98 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99 P. 5-99
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 15 07/11
2
4) E-mail related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed) Error code 2C10 2C11 2C12 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C20 2C21 2C22 2C30 2C31 2C32 2C33 2C40 2C43 2C44 2C60 2C61 2C62 2C63 2C64 2C65 2C66 2C67 2C68 2C69 2C6A 2C6B 2C6C 2C6D 2C70 2C71 2C72 2C80 2C81 2CC0 2CC1
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status
Contents System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error
Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity imum size Illegal Job status System management module access abnormality Illegal Job status Job control module access abnormality Illegal Job status Job control module access abnormality Failed to create directory Directory creation failure Failed to create file File creation failure Failed to delete file File deletion failure Failed to create file File access failure Failed to convert image file format Encryption error. Failed to create file. Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. Failed to read AddressBook Not enough memory Invalid Domain Address Invalid Domain Address Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Invalid address specified in From: field Invalid address specified in To: field
Troubleshooting P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100 P. 5-100
Image conversion abnormality Encryption error Encryption PDF enforced mode error
P. 5-100 P. 5-101 P. 5-101
HDD full failure during processing
P. 5-101
Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Terminal mail address error
P. 5-101 P. 5-100 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-101 P. 5-102
Destination mail address error (No RFC error) System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error
P. 5-102
NIC system error SMTP service is not available Failed SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP Authentication Failed Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Failed to process received Fax job Process failure of FAX job received Job canceled Job canceling Power failure occurred Power failure
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-101 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102 P. 5-102
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 16 07/11
5) File sharing related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed)
2D20
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Illegal Job status
2D21
Illegal Job status
2D22
Illegal Job status
2D30 2D31 2D32 2D33 2D40 2D43 2D44
Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Encryption error. Failed to create file. Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to copy file Invalid parameter specified Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path Specified network path is invalid. Check destination path Logon to file server failed. Check username and password There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. FTP service is not available File Sharing service is not available Expired scan documents deleted from share folder. Expired Sent Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Expired Received Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Scanned documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Sent Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Received Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user’s request. Failed to delete file. Failed to acquire resource. The HDD is running out of capacity for the shared folder. Job canceled Power failure occurred
Error code 2D10 2D11 2D12 2D13 2D14 2D15
2D60 2D61 2D62 2D63 2D64 2D65 2D66 2D67 2D68 2DA0 2DA1 2DA2 2DA3 2DA4 2DA5 2DA6 2DA7 2DA8 2DC0 2DC1
Contents
Troubleshooting
System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding document number
P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103
System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality Encryption error Encryption PDF enforced mode error
P. 5-103
P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104
File library access abnormality Invalid parameter File server connection error
P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-104
Invalid network path
P. 5-104
Login failure
P. 5-104
Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed. HDD full failure during processing
P. 5-104
FTP service not available File sharing service not available Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure Hard disk space in /SHA partition is nearly full (90%). Job canceling Power failure
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
P. 5-103 P. 5-103
P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-104 P. 5-103 P. 5-103 P. 5-104
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 17 07/11
2
6) E-mail reception related error (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed) Error code 3A10 3A11
3A12
3A20 3A21
3A22
3A30 3A40 3A50 3A51
3A52
3A60 3A61
3A62
3A70
3A80 3A81
3A82
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Whole partial mails were not reached by time-out. Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Contents E-mail MIME error
Troubleshooting P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
E-mail analysis error
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Partial mail time-out error
P. 5-105
Partial mail related error
P. 5-105
Insufficient HDD capacity error
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Warning of partial mail interruption
P. 5-105
Partial mail reception setting OFF
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 18 07/11
Error code 3B10 3B11
3B12
3B20 3B21
3B22
3B30 3B31
3B32
3B40 3B41
3B42
3C10 3C11
3C12
3C13 3C20 3C21
3C22
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Format Error has been detected in the received mail. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Contents E-mail format error
Troubleshooting P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
2 Content-Type error
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
Charset error
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
E-mail decode error
P. 5-105 P. 5-105
P. 5-105
TIFF analysis error
P. 5-106 P. 5-106
P. 5-106
P. 5-106 TIFF compression error
P. 5-106 P. 5-106
P. 5-106
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 19
Error code 3C30 3C31
3C32
3C40 3C41
3C42
3C50 3C51
3C52
3C60 3C61
3C62
3C70 3D10
3D20
3D30 3E10 3E20 3E30 3E40
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Power Failure has been occurred in E-mail receiving. SMTP Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail was deleted. Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail. Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error occurred in received mail.
Contents TIFF resolution error
Troubleshooting P. 5-106 P. 5-106
P. 5-106
TIFF paper size error
P. 5-106 P. 5-106
P. 5-106
Offramp destination error
P. 5-106 P. 5-106
P. 5-106
Offramp security error
P. 5-106 P. 5-106
P. 5-106
Power failure error
P. 5-106
Destination address error
P. 5-106
Offramp destination limitation error
P. 5-106
FAX board error
P. 5-106
POP3 server connection error
P. 5-107
POP3 server connection time-out error POP3 login error
P. 5-107
POP3 login method error
P. 5-107
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
P. 5-107
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 20 05/11
Error code 3F00 3F10 3F20 3F30 3F40
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen File I/O Error has been occurred in this mail. The mail could not be received until File I/O is recovered.
Contents File I/O error
Troubleshooting P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107
2
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 21
2.1.4
Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen (When GM-1010/3010, GM-2010, GM-1060/4060, GM-2060, GM-1061/4060, GM-2061, GM-1120/ 4120, or GM-2120 is installed) Error code 4030
4031 4032 4033
4034 4035 4036 A221 A222 A290 A291 A292
Contents No Printer Kit / Printer Kit function disabled: The Printer Kit (GM-1010) or the Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2010) is not installed. Or network printing of an XPS file is performed without the Expansion Memory (GC-1230), or network printing is performed after the termination of a trial period. HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid network print are saved in HDD. Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed. Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be performed. e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD (print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed. Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save. User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not registered as a user. Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from the print job screen. Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during print job (copy, list print, network print). Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time. Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code. Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting P. 5-107
P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107
P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-107 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108 P. 5-108
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 22 07/11
<
> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 EA10 Error code YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.) A
B
C D E F
G H I J K L
MMM NNN O
Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Unused 5: PFP lower drawer6: Unused 7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Mode 2: Black
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 23 06/06
2
<> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example 99999999 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 EA10 Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 8 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.) A
B
C D E F
G H I J K L
MMM NNN O
Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer 6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5SQK: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Mode 2: Black
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 24 07/11
2.2
Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode Control panel check mode Test mode Test print mode Adjustment mode Setting mode List print mode PM support mode Firmware update mode
For start [0]+[1]+ [POWER] [0]+[3]+ [POWER] [0]+[4]+ [POWER] [0]+[5]+ [POWER] [0]+[8]+ [POWER] [9]+[START]+ [POWER] [6]+[START]+ [POWER] [8]+[9]+ [POWER]
Contents All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink. Checks the status of input/output signals. Outputs the test patterns. Adjusts various items. Sets various items. Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. Clears each counter. Performs updating of the system firmware.
For exit [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON
Display 100% C A4 TEST MODE 100% P A4 TEST PRINT 100% A A4 TEST MODE 100% D TEST MODE 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT 100% K TEST MODE -
Notes: 1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously. 2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagnosis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line connectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connecting the modular code. • Control panel check mode (01): [0][1] [POWER]
LED lit/ LCD blinking
[START]
(Button check)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[START]
Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.) •
Test mode (03): Refer to P. 2-27 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/ P. 2-34 "2.2.2 Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)" and P. 2-42 "2.2.3 Output check (test mode 03)".
•
Test print mode (04): Refer to P. 2-45 "2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04)"
•
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)"/ P. 2-64 "2.2.6 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 25 07/11
2
•
Setting mode (08): Refer to P. 2-82 "2.2.7 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)" P. 2-144 "2.2.8 Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
•
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START] [POWER]
[START] [Digital keys] (Code) Key in the first 101: Adjustment mode (05) code to be printed 102: Setting mode (08)
[START]
[Digital keys] Key in the last code to be printed
[START] List starts to be printed
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
(Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history
•
PM support mode (6S):
[6][START] [POWER]
•
(Code) 1: Auto-toner adjustment 2: PM Support Screen
[START] (Operation started)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6.FIRMWARE UPDATING“ [POWER] ON Normal [0][1]
Warming up
Control panel check mode
[0][3]
Test mode
[0][4] Test print mode
[0][5] Adjustment mode
[0][8] Setting mode
[9][START] List print mode
[6][START] PM support mode
[8][9]
Firmware update mode
Ready
[POWER] OFF *1 To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 26 07/11
2.2.1
Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO350/450)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in the test mode (03). [0][3] [POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
2 [Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode. [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
Automatic ( adjustment )
([FAX]) (Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 27 05/12
[FAX] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF) Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A B C D E F G H A
LCF connection Bypass unit connection Bypass paper sensor ADU connection ADU opening/closing switch ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor PFP upper drawer detection switch
Not connected Not connected No paper Not connected ADU opened Paper present Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position
B C
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
D E F G H
PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover opening/closing switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom position
B
LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor
Correct stacking Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position
C D E
LCF drawer detection switch
F G H
LCF feed side paper stock sensor
A
PFP lower drawer detection sensor
B C
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
D E
PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F G H
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
e.g. Connected Connected Paper present Connected ADU closed No paper No paper Drawer present Paper present No paper Connected Cover closed Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Incorrect stacking Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present No paper Normal rotation Paper present Other than upper limit position
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 28 05/12
Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[5]
A
LCF end fence home position sensor
B
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C D E
LCF standby side empty sensor LCF side cover opening/closing switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor
F
[6]
[7]
G H A B C D E F
LCF feed sensor LCF feed side empty sensor
G H
Upper drawer empty sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor
A B C D E F G H
A B C D E F [8] G H
Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Abnormal rotation Tray at upper limit position No paper Paper present Paper present Toner bag full
Upper drawer feed sensor Toner bag full detection sensor-1
No paper Tray at upper limit position -
Paper present No paper Tray at upper limit position
Lower drawer feed sensor Lower drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Bypass feed paper width sensor-3 Bypass feed paper width sensor-2 Bypass feed paper width sensor-1 Bypass feed paper width sensor-0 Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e.g. Other than home position Other than stop position Paper present Cover opened Normal rotation Other than upper limit position Paper present No paper No paper Toner bag not full Paper present Other than upper limit position No paper Paper present Other than upper limit position -
Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Paper full Paper not full Separetor at home position Cover opened
Other than home position Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 29 05/11
2
Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[9]
[0]
A B C D
Upper drawer detection switch
E
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
F G H A B C D
Lower drawer detection switch
E
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
F G H
Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty -
-
e.g. Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present -
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width). 3 0 1 1 1 0 1
Bypass paper width sensor 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Paper-width size
0 1 1 1 0 1 1
A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 30 05/11
[FAX] button: ON ([FAX] LED: ON) Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
[3]
24 V power supply IPC board connection Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Toner cartridge switch Registration sensor Exit sensor Auto-toner sensor connection Front cover opening/closing switch Destination detection
A B C
Side cover opening/closing switch Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Key copy counter connection Toner bag full detection sensor-2
D
Fuser unit connection
E
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is installed) Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bypass feed sensor High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection
F G
H
[4]
-
A B C D E F G H
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Power ON Not connected Abnormal rotation OFF Paper present Paper present Not connected Cover opened Other than SAD Cover opened Abnormal rotation Not connected Toner bag full
e.g. Power OFF Connected Normal rotation ON No paper No paper Connected Cover closed SAD
Fuser unit installed No paper
Cover closed Normal rotation Connected Toner bag not full Fuser unit not installed Paper present
Paper not full
Paper full
Paper full
Paper not full
Paper full No paper
Paper not full Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Paper present No paper Normal
No paper Paper present Abnormal
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 31 05/11
2
Digital key
Button
Items to check
A B C D E F
RADF connection
G
Platen sensor
H
Carriage home position sensor
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g.
[5]
A B C D
APS sensor (APS-R)
RADF connected Platen cove opened Carriage at home position No original
E
APS sensor (APS-C)
No original
F
APS sensor (APS-3)
No original
G
APS sensor (APS-2)
No original
H
APS sensor (APS-1)
No original
A
RADF tray sensor
B
RADF empty sensor
C D E
RADF jam access cover switch RADF opening/closing sensor RADF exit sensor
F
RADF reverse sensor
G
RADF read sensor
H
RADF registration sensor
Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present
-
[6]
[7]
[8]
A B C D E
RADF original length sensor
F
RADF original width sensor-1
G
RADF original width sensor-2
H
RADF original width sensor-3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
e.g. Not connected Platen cove closed Other than home position Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present No original No original Cover closed RADF closed No original No original No original No original No original No original No original No original
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 32 05/11
Digital key
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Button
Items to check
A
D E F G H A
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection3 Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2010))
Connectable
B
Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1010))
Connectable
C
Dongle (for Scanner upgrade kit (GM-3010))
Connectable
D
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices
Connectable
e.g.
B C [9]
[0]
E F G H
e.g.
Refer to table 2 Refer to table 2
2
Refer to table 2
-
-
Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable -
Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-3
Bridge unit Normal display
Job Separator Highlighting display
Offset Tray Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 33 05/11
2.2.2
Input check (Test mode 03) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in the test mode (03). [0][3] [POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode. [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
Automatic ( adjustment )
([FAX]) (Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Fig. 2-3 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 34 07/11
[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: OFF) Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
A B C D E F G H A
LCF connection Bypass unit connection Bypass paper sensor ADU connection ADU opening/closing switch ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor PFP upper drawer detection switch
Not connected Not connected No paper Not connected ADU opened Paper present Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position
B C
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
D E F G H
PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover opening/closing switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
A
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom position
B
LCF standby side paper mis-stacking sensor
Correct stacking Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position
C D E
LCF drawer detection switch
F G H
LCF feed side paper stock sensor
A
PFP lower drawer detection sensor
B C
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
D E
PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
F G H
-
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e.g. Connected Connected Paper present Connected ADU closed No paper No paper Drawer present Paper present No paper Connected Cover closed Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Incorrect stacking Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present No paper Normal rotation Paper present Other than upper limit position
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 35 05/11
2
Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[5]
A
LCF end fence home position sensor
B
LCF end fence stop position sensor
C D E
LCF standby side empty sensor LCF side cover opening/closing switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor
F
[6]
[7]
G H A B C D E F
LCF feed sensor LCF feed side empty sensor
G H
Upper drawer empty sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor
A B C D E F G H
A B C D E F [8] G H
Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Abnormal rotation Tray at upper limit position No paper Paper present Paper present Toner bag full
Upper drawer feed sensor Toner bag full detection sensor-1
No paper Tray at upper limit position -
Paper present No paper Tray at upper limit position
Lower drawer feed sensor Lower drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Bypass feed paper width sensor-3 Bypass feed paper width sensor-2 Bypass feed paper width sensor-1 Bypass feed paper width sensor-0 Job Separetor upper stack sensor (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray home position sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separetor cover switch (When Job Separetor is installed) Offset Tray cover switch (When Offset Tray is installed)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
e.g. Other than home position Other than stop position Paper present Cover opened Normal rotation Other than upper limit position Paper present No paper No paper Toner bag not full Paper present Other than upper limit position No paper Paper present Other than upper limit position -
Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Paper full Paper not full Separetor at home position Cover opened
Other than home position Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
Cover opened
Cover closed
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 36 05/11
Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[9]
[0]
A B C D
Upper drawer detection switch
E
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
F G H A B C D
Lower drawer detection switch
E
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
F G H
Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Drawer not installed Paper almost empty -
-
e.g. Drawer present Paper present Drawer present Paper present -
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width). 3 0 1 1 1 0 1
Bypass paper width sensor 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Paper-width size
0 1 1 1 0 1 1
A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 37 05/11
2
[FAX] button: ON/ [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/ [COPY] LED: OFF) Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g.
[1]
[2]
A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
[3]
24 V power supply IPC board connection Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Toner cartridge switch Registration sensor Exit sensor Auto-toner sensor connection Front cover opening/closing switch Destination detection
A B C
Side cover opening/closing switch Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Key copy counter connection Toner bag full detection sensor-2
D
Fuser unit connection
E
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (When bridge unit is installed) Bridge unit paper full detection sensor (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator lower stack sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray stack sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (When bridge unit is installed) Job Separator feed sensor (When Job Separator is installed) Offset Tray feed sensor (When Offset Tray is installed) Bypass feed sensor High-voltage power supply abnormality (shutdown) detection
F G
H
[4]
-
A B C D E F G H
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Power ON Not connected Abnormal rotation OFF Paper present Paper present Not connected Cover opened Other than SAD Cover opened Abnormal rotation Not connected Toner bag full
e.g. Power OFF Connected Normal rotation ON No paper No paper Connected Cover closed SAD
Fuser unit installed No paper
Cover closed Normal rotation Connected Toner bag not full Fuser unit not installed Paper present
Paper not full
Paper full
Paper full
Paper not full
Paper full No paper
Paper not full Paper present
Paper present
No paper
Paper present No paper Normal
No paper Paper present Abnormal
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 38 05/11
Digital key
Button
Items to check
A B C D E F
RADF connection
G
Platen sensor
H
Carriage home position sensor
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g.
[5]
A B C D
APS sensor (APS-R)
RADF connected Platen cove opened Carriage at home position No original
E
APS sensor (APS-C)
No original
F
APS sensor (APS-3)
No original
G
APS sensor (APS-2)
No original
H
APS sensor (APS-1)
No original
A
RADF tray sensor
B
RADF empty sensor
C D E
RADF jam access cover switch RADF opening/closing sensor RADF exit sensor
F
RADF reverse sensor
G
RADF read sensor
H
RADF registration sensor
Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present -
-
[6]
[7]
A B C D E
RADF original length sensor
F
RADF original width sensor-1
G
RADF original width sensor-2
H
-
[8]
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e.g. Not connected Platen cove closed Other than home position Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present No original No original Cover closed RADF closed No original No original No original No original No original No original No original -
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 39 05/11
2
Digital key
Button
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play
Items to check
e.g. A B C [9]
[0]
D E F G H A B C D E F G H
e.g.
Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2 1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2 2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection- Refer to table 2 3 -
-
Table 2. Connecting status of additional options at inner area of the equipment Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-1 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-2 Bridge unit/Job Separator/Offset Tray connection detection-3
Bridge unit Normal display
Job Separator Highlighting display
Offset Tray Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Highlighting display
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
Normal display
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 40 05/11
[FAX] button: OFF/ [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/ [COPY] LED: ON) Digital key
Button
Items to check
Contents Highlighted Normal disdisplay play e.g.
[0]
A
Dongle (for Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2060)) Connected
Connectable
B
Dongle (for Printer kit (GM-1060)) Connected
Connectable
C
Dongle (for Scanner kit (GM-4060)) Connected
Connectable
D
Dongles for other equipments/Other USB devices Connected Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1) -
Connectable
E F G H
Acceptable -
e.g. Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not acceptable -
*1 • •
•
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with this code. Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code cannot be used. It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 41 05/11
2
2.2.3
Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
Procedure 1 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
Operation ON
[START]
Stop code
[START]
Operation OFF
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 2 [0][3] [POWER]
[START]
(Code)
Operation One direction
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation ON
[START]
Operation OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [0][3] [POWER]
Code 101 102 103 108 109 110 118 120 121 122 177 201 202 203 204 205 206
(Code)
[START]
[POWER] OFF
Function Code Main motor ON (operational without 151 developer unit) Toner motor ON (normal rotation) 152 Polygonal motor ON (600 dpi) 153 Registration clutch ON 158 PFP motor ON 159 ADU motor ON 160 Laser ON 168 Exit motor ON (normal rotation) 170 Exit motor ON (reverse rotation) 171 LCF motor ON 172 Offset Tray motor ON (reciprocating movement) Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF Transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Function Code No.101 function OFF
Procedure 1
Code No.102 function OFF Code No.103 function OFF Code No.108 function OFF Code No.109 function OFF Code No.110 function OFF Code No.118 function OFF Code No.120 function OFF Code No.121 function OFF Code No.122 function OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 42 05/12
Code
Function
Procedure
207
LCF end fence reciprocating movement
2
208
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF
3
209
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
3
210
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF
3
217
Sub-separation fan ON/OFF
3
218
Key copy counter count up
2
222
ADU clutch ON/OFF
3
225
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF
3
226
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
228
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
232
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
3
234
Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF
3
235
Discharge LED ON/OFF
3
236
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
237
Exhaust fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
238
IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
241
IH board cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
242
Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
243
Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
248
Developer bias [+DC] ON/OFF
3
249
Developer bias [-DC] ON/OFF
3
252
Main charger ON/OFF
3
253
Separation bias ON/OFF
3
255
Transfer guide bias ON/OFF
3
256
Transfer transformer ON/OFF
3
261
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the [ZOOM] button
2
264
SLG board cooling fan 1 ON/OFF
3
265
SLG board cooling fan 2 ON/OFF
3
267
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF
3
268
Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
269
Laser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
271
LCF tray-up motor (up/down)
2
278
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
280
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
2
281
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
282
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
3
283
RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
284
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
3
285
RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
3
289
Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (high speed)
3
290
Developer unit cooling fan-1 ON/OFF (low speed)
3
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 43 05/11
2
Code
Function
Procedure
294
RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF
3
295
Power OFF mode (for 200 V series)
4
297
RADF fan motor ON/OFF
3
410
Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
411
Power supply cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
412
Middle fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
413
Middle fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
432
Developer drive clutch ON/OFF
3
461
Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
3
462
Fuser unit cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
3
463
Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (low speed)
3
464
Developer unit cooling fan-2 ON/OFF (high speed)
3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 44
2.2.4
Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
[0][4] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation Continuous Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
111
Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Error diffusion
113
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps
Error diffusion
142
Grid pattern
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 45 05/12
2
2.2.5
Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[START]
[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2 [0][5] [POWER]
(Code)
(
[START]
Value displayed
)
[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START] [CANCEL]
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[ENTER] or ([FAX] ) [INTERRUPT] (Test copy) value (Stores in RAM )
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 6 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START]
Automatic ( adjustment )
([FAX]) (Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 46 05/12
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
(
[START]
Automatic adjustment
)
(
[ENTER] Stores value in RAM
)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
([FAX]) (Test copy)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
Procedure 10 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
(
Value displayed
)
[START]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17 [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] [UP] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
([FAX]) (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM
When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen. Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
1
Grid pattern
Refer to P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
3
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)
Refer to P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 47 04/05
2
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
Developer
201
Developer
205 210
Developer Charger
221
Transfer
231
Separation
286
Laser
305
Scanner
306
Scanner
308
Scanner
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 17 Automatic adjustment of ALL As the value increases, auto-toner sensor (Fuserthe sensor output heater ON) increases correspondingly. The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes after this adjustment was started and is automatically set in the range of 2.35 to 2.45V. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. (P. 3-1) Correction of auto-toner ALL 128 M Corrects the control 3 sensor (Fuser heater ON) <0-255> value of the auto-toner sensor setup in 05-200. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. 3 Developer bias DC outputALL 189 M As the value increases, adjustment <0-255> the transformer output increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL 154 M 3 ingly. Remove the put adjustment <0-255> developer unit and Transfer transformer DC ALL 115 M 3 install the adjustment output adjustment/Center <0-255> jig to make adjustvalue ment. However, the Separation transformer AC ALL 166 M 3 adjustment jig is not output adjustment/Center <0-255> necessary to adjust the value developer bias DC.(P. 3-29) Laser power adjustment ALL 121 M When the value 3 <0-255> increases, the laser output increases correspondingly. Image location adjustment ALL 128 SYS When the value 1 of secondary scanning <92-164> increases by “1”, the direction (scanner section) image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. 1 ALL 145 SYS When the value Image location adjustment <0-255> increases by “1”, the of primary scanning direcimage shifts by approx. tion (scanner section) 0.0846mm toward the front side of the paper. Distortion mode ALL Moves carriages to the 6 adjusting position. (P. 3-12)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 48 05/12
Code
Classification
340
Scanner
354
RADF
355
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Reproduction ratio adjustALL 128 SYS ment of secondary scan<0-255> ning direction (scanner section)
for singlesidedoriginal for doublesidedoriginal Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization Adjustment of RADF paper alignment
ALL
10 <0-20>
SYS
ALL
10 <0-20>
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
356
RADF
357
RADF
Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed
ALL
50 <0-100>
SYS
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation adjustment
ALL
128 <0-255>
SYS
359
Scanner
Carriage position adjustment during scanning from RADF
ALL
128 <0-255>
SYS
365
RADF
RADF leading edge position adjustment
ALL
50 <0-100>
SYS
ALL
50 <0-100>
SYS
366
for single sided original for double sided original
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5mm.
1
Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced. When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx. 0.1%. When the value increases by “1”, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0846mm. When the value increases by “1”, the carriage position when using the RADF shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the original feeding side. When the value increases by “1”, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge of paper by approx. 0.1mm.
6
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 49 05/10
Code
Classification
367
RADF
368
Laser
401
Laser
405
410
Laser
411 421
Drive
422
424
Drive
425 430
Image
431
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 6 RADF original guide width ALL Stores the current adjustment (Minimum) width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the minimum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. 6 RADF original guide width ALL Stores the current adjustment (Maximum) width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the maximum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. 1 Fine adjustment of polygoPRT 133 M When the value <0-255> increases by “1”, the nal motor rotation speed (adjustment of primary reproduction ratio of PPC 129 M primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255> duction ratio) tion increases by approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1mm/step) Adjustment of primary PPC 128 M When the value 1 scanning laser writing start <0-255> increases by “1”, the position. writing start position PRT 128 M shifts to the front side <0-255> by approx. 0.0423mm. 1 Adjustment of secondary PPC/ 138 M When the value scanning direction reproPRT <0-255> increases by “1”, the duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of FAX 139 M ment of main motor speed) secondary scanning <0-255> direction increases by approx. 0.04%. Fine adjustment of exit PPC/ 107 M When the value 1 motor speed PRT <0-255> increases by “1”, the rotation becomes faster FAX 121 M by approx. 0.05%. <0-255> 1 Top margin adjustment PPC 0 M When the value (blank area at the leading <0-255> increases by “1”, the edge of the paper) blank area becomes wider by approx. Left margin adjustment PPC 0 M 1 0.0423mm. (blank area at the left of the <0-255> paper along the paper feeding direction)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 50 05/11
Code
Classification
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
440
Laser
441 442 443 444 445
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Right margin adjustment PPC 0 M (blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PPC 0 M (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) M Bottom margin adjustment PPC/ EUR: 48 (blank area at the trailing PRT UC:24 edge of the paper)/ JPN: 24 Reverse side at duplexing Others: 48 <0-255> Right margin adjustment PPC/ 12 M PRT <0-255> (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction)/Reverse side at duplexing PRT 24 M Top margin adjustment <0-255> (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the left of the <0-255> paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) ALL 7 M Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-15> secondary scanning Lower ALL 24 M laser writing drawer <0-40> start position Bypass ALL 8 M feeding <0-15> LCF ALL 8 M <0-15> PFP ALL 8 M <0-15> Duplex ALL 8 M feeding <0-15>
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
Procedur e 1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the leading edge of the paper by approx. 0.2mm.
1 1 1 1 1 1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 51
2
Code 448-0
Classification Paper feeding
448-1 448-2
449-0
Paper feeding
449-1 449-2
450-0
Paper feeding
450-1 450-2 452-0
Paper feeding
452-1 452-2 455-0
Paper feeding
455-1 455-2
457
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 10 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 8 M (PFP upper size 1 <0-63> drawer / Plain paper) ALL 10 M Paper aligning Long amount size <0-63> adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 8 M (PFP lower size <0-63> drawer / Plain paper) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Upper drawer size <0-63> / Plain paper) ALL 12 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 10 M (Lower drawer size <0-63> / Plain paper) ALL 20 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 20 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 30 M (Duplex feed- size <0-63> ing / Plain paper) Paper aligning amount ALL 8 M adjustment at the registra<0-63> tion section (LCF / Plain paper)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter
Procedur e 4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 52
Code 458-0
Classification Paper feeding
458-1 458-2
460-0
Paper feeding
460-1 460-2
461-0
Paper feeding
461-1 461-2
462-0
Paper feeding
462-1 462-2 462-3 463-0
Paper feeding
463-1 463-2 466-0 466-1 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 26 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 25 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Plain paper) Paper aligning Long ALL 26 M size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 26 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick paper 1) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick paper 2) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick Post ALL 14 M paper 3) card <0-63> ALL 26 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 26 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/OHP film) ALL 143 M Adjustment of Plain paper <0-255> paper pushing amount / Post card ALL 173 M Bypass feed<0-255> ing Thick ALL 143 M paper 1 <0-255> Thick ALL 143 M paper 2 <0-255> Thick ALL 143 M paper 3 <0-255> OHP film ALL 128 M <0-255>
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter * Postcard is supported only for JPN model.
Procedur e 4 4
2 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 When the value increases by “1”, the driving speed of bypass feed roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. * Post card is supported only for JPN model.
4 4 4 4 4 4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 53
Code
Classification
467
Paper feeding
468-0
Finisher
468-1 468-2 469-0
Paper feeding
469-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of paper pushALL 128 M When the value ing amount/Duplex feed<0-255> increases by “1”, the ing (short size) driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. A4-R/LT-R ALL 0 M When the value Fine adjust<-14-14> increases by “1”, the ment of bindbinding/folding position ing position/ B4 ALL 0 M shifts toward the right folding posi<-14-14> page by 0.25 mm. tion A3/LD ALL 0 M Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer)
469-2
469-3
469-4
469-5
470-0
Paper feeding
470-1 470-2
471-0 471-1 471-2
Paper feeding
Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Thick paper 1)
Thick Paper 1 Long size Thick Paper 1 Middle size Thick Paper 1 Short size Thick Paper 2 Long size Thick Paper 2 Middle size Thick Paper 2 Short size Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size
ALL
<-14-14> 20 <0-63>
M
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter
Procedur e 1
4 4 4 4
ALL
20 <0-63>
M
ALL
20 <0-63>
M
ALL
20 <0-63>
M
4
ALL
22 <0-63>
M
4
ALL
19 <0-63>
M
4
ALL
20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
4
4
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 54
Code 472-0
Classification Paper feeding
472-1 472-2
473
Paper feeding
474-0
Paper feeding
474-1 474-2
497-0
Laser
497-1 497-2 497-3 497-4 497-5 498-0
Laser
498-1
501
Image
503 504 505 506 507
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 20 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 22 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 19 M (PFP lower size <0-63> drawer / Thick paper 1) ALL 8 M Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registra<0-63> tion section (LCF / Thick paper 1) Paper aligning Long ALL 24 M amount size <0-63> adjustment at Middle ALL 24 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 33 M (Duplex feed- size <0-63> ing / Thick paper 1) ALL 128 M Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-255> drawer sideways deviaLower ALL 128 M tion drawer <0-255> PFP upper ALL 128 M drawer <0-255> PFP lower ALL 128 M drawer <0-255> LCF ALL 128 M <0-255> Bypass ALL 128 M feeding <0-255> ALL 148 M Adjustment of Long size <0-255> primary scanning laser ALL 148 M Short writing start <0-255> size(A4/LT position at or smaller) duplex feeding Density Photo PPC 128 SYS adjustment <0-255> Fine adjustText/Photo PPC 128 SYS ment of “man<0-255> ual density” Text PPC 128 SYS /Center value <0-255> Text/Photo PPC 20 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustPhoto PPC 20 SYS ment of “man<0-255> ual density” Text PPC 20 SYS /Light step <0-255> value
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter
Procedur e 4 4
2 4
1
4 4 4
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
4 4 4 4 4 4
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
4 4
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
1 1 1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 55 05/11
Code
Classification
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514 515 532
Image
533 534 570
571
572
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Text/Photo PPC EUR: 20 SYS Density UC: 20 adjustment JPN : 30 Fine adjust<0-255> ment of “manual density” Photo PPC EUR: 24 SYS /Dark step UC: 24 value JPN: 24 <0-255> Text PPC EUR: 20 SYS UC: 20 JPN: 27 <0-255> Photo PPC 128 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustText/Photo PPC 128 SYS ment of “auto<0-255> matic density” Text PPC 128 SYS <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 SYS tion / Back<0-255> ground peak Photo PPC 16 SYS adjustment <0-255> Text PPC 64 SYS <0-255> EUR: 12 SYS Range correc- Text/Photo PPC UC: 12 tion on origiJPN: 22 nal manually <11-14, set on the 21-24, original glass 31-34, 41-44> SYS Photo PPC 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Text PPC 22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
Procedur e 1
1
1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1 1
When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.
1 1 1
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”.Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 56 04/10
Code
Classification
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
620
Image
621
622
653
Image
654
Image
655
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 1 Gamma data Text/Photo PPC 0 SYS One’s place: slope adjust<0-99> 0:Equivalent to the set ment value 5 Photo PPC 0 SYS 1 1 to 9: Select the slope <0-99> of Gamma curve Text PPC 0 SYS 1 (The larger the <0-99> value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Ten’s place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value 1 Sharpness Text/Photo PPC 1 SYS When the value adjustment <0-99> increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value Photo PPC 2 SYS decreases, the image 1 becomes softer. The <0-99> smaller the value is, the less the moire Text PPC EUR: 45 SYS becomes.One’s place: 1 Fixed value (05-620 is UC: 45 “1”, 05-621 is “2”, 05JPN: 45 622 is “5”) Ten’s place: <0-99> Sharpness intensity (0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) 1 Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC 208 SYS Adjusts the level of the smudged/faint <0-255> smudged/faint text text.With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. Adjustment of PS PRT 5 SYS Adjustment of the 1 smudged/faint <0-9> smudged/faint text PCL PRT 5 SYS text.With decreasing 1 the value, the faint text <0-9> is suppressed, and with increasing it, the smudged text is suppressed.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 57
2
Code
Classification
672-0
Image
672-1 672-2 672-3 672-4 676-0
Image
676-1 676-2 676-3 676-4 693
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of Normal PRT 0 M printer image <0-10> density PRT 4 M <0-10> PRT 5 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10> PRT 10 M <0-10> Toner PRT 0 M saving <0-10> PRT 4 M <0-10> PRT 5 M <0-10> PRT 6 M <0-10> PRT 10 M <0-10> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC EUR: 12 SYS tion on origiUC: 12 nal set on the JPN: 22 RADF <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
694
Photo
PPC
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
695
Text
PPC
22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
Center value
FAX
120 <0-255>
SYS
701
Light step value
FAX
20 <0-255>
SYS
702
Dark step value
FAX
20 <0-255>
SYS
700
Image
Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Adjustment of the image density.With decreasing the value, the text becomes lighter.
Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image of “light” side becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image of “dark” side becomes darker.
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 58
Code
Classification
710
Image
714 715
Image
719
720
Image
724
725
Image
729
825
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density Photo FAX 128 SYS adjustment <0-255> Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS ual density”/ <0-255> Center value Photo FAX 20 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS ual density”/ <0-255> Light step value Photo FAX 20 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS ual density”/ <0-255> Dark step value Photo FAX 128 SYS Density <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustment of “auto- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS matic density <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original manually set on the original glass
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
826
Text
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
827
Photo
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
1
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
1
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1
1
1
1
1
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 59
2
Code
Classification
830
Image
831
832
835
Image
836
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- SYS Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 tion on origi<11-14, nal set on the 21-24, RADF 31-34, 41-44> Text SCN 12 SYS <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Photo SCN 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
Range correc- Text/Photo tion / Background peak Text adjustment
837 845
Image
846 847 850
Image
851 852 855
Image
856 857
860 861 862
Image
SCN SCN
Photo
SCN
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Center value
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ adjustment/ Dark step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “automatic density”
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 40 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS SYS
Contents Sets whether the value of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
SYS SYS
1
1 1
1 1
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS SYS
1
1
SYS SYS
Procedur e
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1 1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 60
Code
Classification
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
913
Image
914
Image
915
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS justment(Text/ tion ratio <0-99> Photo) 40% or smaller Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 41-80% 1 SYS Reproduc- SCN tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS <0-99> justment(Text) tion ratio 40% or smaller 2 SYS Reproduc- SCN <0-99> tion ratio 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS justtion ratio <0-99> ment(Photo) 40% or smaller Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Custom PPC EUR: 12 SYS Range correcMode 1 UC: 12 tion on origiJPN: 22 nal manually <11-14, set on the 21-24, original glass 31-34, 41-44> SYS Custom PPC 22 Mode 2 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Custom PPC 12 Mode 3 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. One’s place: Fixed value (05-865 is “1”, 05-866 is “2”, 05-867 is “5”) Ten’s place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity)
Procedur e 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 61
2
Code
Classification
916
Image
917
Image
918
Image
919
Image
920
Image
921
Image
922
Image
923
Image
924
Image
928
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Range correcCustom PPC EUR: 12 SYS tion on origiMode 1 UC: 12 nal set on the JPN: 22 RADF <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS Custom PPC 22 Mode 2 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> Custom PPC 12 SYS Mode 3 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
Range correction Background peak adjustment
Sharpness adjustment
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2
PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC
Custom Mode 3
PPC
Custom Mode 1
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
40 <0-255> 64 <0-255> 16 <0-255> 1 <0-99> EUR: 45 UC: 45 JPN: 45 <0-99> 2 <0-99>
208 <0-255>
SYS SYS
Contents Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. One's place: Fixed value (05-922 is "1", 05-923 is "5", 05-924 is "2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed.
1 1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 62
Code
Classification
931
Image
932
Image
933
Image
934
Image
935 936 937
Image
938 939 940
Image
941 942 943
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density Custom PPC 128 SYS adjustment Mode 1 <0-255> Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 128 SYS Center value Mode 3 <0-255> Custom PPC 20 SYS Density Mode 1 <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 20 SYS ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 20 SYS Light step Mode 3 <0-255> value Custom PPC 20 SYS Density Mode 1 <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 20 SYS ment of "manMode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 20 SYS Dark step Mode 3 <0-255> value Custom PPC 128 SYS Density Mode 1 <0-255> adjustment Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS ment of "autoMode 2 <0-255> matic density" Custom PPC 128 SYS Mode 3 <0-255> Custom PPC 0 SYS Gamma data Mode 1 <0-99> slope adjustment
944
Custom Mode 2
PPC
0 <0-99>
SYS
945
Custom Mode 3
PPC
0 <0-99>
SYS
Equipment number (serial number) entry
ALL
-
SYS
976
Maintenance
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents When the value increases, the image of the center step becomes darker.
Procedur e 1 1
2 1
When the value increases, the image of the "light" step density becomes lighter.
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image of the "Dark" step density becomes lighter.
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1 1
One’s place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of Gammacurve (The larger the value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Ten’s place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value When this adjustment is performed with this code, the setting code (08-995) is also performed automatically (10 digits)
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 63 04/05
2.2.6
Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[START]
[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2 [0][5] [POWER]
(Code)
(
[START]
Value displayed
)
[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START] [CANCEL]
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[ENTER] ([FAX]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[ENTER] or ([FAX] ) [INTERRUPT] (Test copy) value (Stores in RAM )
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 6 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START]
Automatic ( adjustment )
([FAX]) (Test copy)
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 64 07/11
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
(
[START]
Automatic adjustment
)
(
[ENTER] Stores value in RAM
)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
([FAX]) (Test copy)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
Procedure 10 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
(
Value displayed
)
[START]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17 [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] [UP] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
([FAX]) (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM
When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen. Code
Types of test pattern
Remarks
1
Grid pattern
Refer to P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
3
Grid pattern (Duplex printing)
Refer to P. 3-7 "3.2.3 Printer related adjustment"
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 65 05/12
2
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
Developer
201
Developer
205 210
Developer Charger
221
Transfer
231
Separation
286
Laser
305
Scanner
306
Scanner
308
Scanner
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 17 Automatic adjustment of ALL As the value increases, auto-toner sensor (Fuserthe sensor output heater ON) increases correspondingly. The value starts changing approx. 2 minutes after this adjustment was started and is automatically set in the range of 2.35 to 2.45V. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. (P. 3-1) Correction of auto-toner ALL 128 M Corrects the control 3 sensor (Fuser heater ON) <0-255> value of the auto-toner sensor setup in 05-200. * Selection is disable when developer unit is not installed. 3 Developer bias DC outputALL 189 M As the value increases, adjustment <0-255> the transformer output increases correspondMain charger grid bias outALL 154 M 3 ingly. Remove the put adjustment <0-255> developer unit and Transfer transformer DC ALL 115 M 3 install the adjustment output adjustment/Center <0-255> jig to make adjustvalue ment. However, the Separation transformer AC ALL 166 M 3 adjustment jig is not output adjustment/Center <0-255> necessary to adjust the value developer bias DC.(P. 3-29) Laser power adjustment ALL 121 M When the value 3 <0-255> increases, the laser output increases correspondingly. Image location adjustment ALL 128 SYS When the value 1 of secondary scanning <92-164> increases by “1”, the direction (scanner section) image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. 1 ALL 145 SYS When the value Image location adjustment <0-255> increases by “1”, the of primary scanning direcimage shifts by approx. tion (scanner section) 0.0846mm toward the front side of the paper. Distortion mode ALL Moves carriages to the 6 adjusting position. (P. 3-12)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 66 07/11
Code
Classification
340
Scanner
350
Scanner
351
354
RADF
355
357
RADF
358
RADF
359
Scanner
365
RADF
366
401 405
Laser
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Reproduction ratio adjustALL 128 SYS When the value ment of secondary scan<0-255> increases by “1”, the ning direction reproduction ratio in (scanner section) the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. ALL 128 SYS 0.1369 mm/step Shading posi- Original tion adjustglass <118ment 138> RADF ALL 128 SYS <118138> ALL 10 SYS When the value Adjustment of for single<0-20> increases by “1”, the sidedorigiRADF paper aligning amount nal alignment for doubleALL 10 SYS increases by approx. 0.5mm. sidedorigi<0-20> nal Fine adjustment of RADF ALL 50 SYS When the value transport speed <0-100> increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx. 0.1%. RADF sideways deviation ALL 128 SYS When the value adjustment <0-255> increases by “1”, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0846mm. Carriage position adjustALL 128 SYS When the value ment during scanning from <0-255> increases by “1”, the RADF carriage position when using the RADF shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the original feeding side. RADF leadfor single ALL 50 SYS When the value ing edge posi- sided orig<0-100> increases by “1”, the tion inal copied image of origiadjustment ALL 50 SYS nal fed from the RADF for double shifts toward the trailing <0-100> sided origedge of paper by inal approx. 0.1mm. PRT 133 M When the value Fine adjustment of polygo<0-255> increases by “1”, the nal motor rotation speed reproduction ratio of (adjustment of primary PPC 129 M primary scanning direcscanning direction repro<0-255> tion increases by duction ratio) approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1mm/step)
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 67 07/11
Code
Classification
410
Laser
411 421
Drive
422
424
Drive
425 430
Image
431
Image
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of primary PPC 128 M When the value scanning laser writing start <0-255> increases by “1”, the position. writing start position PRT 128 M shifts to the front side <0-255> by approx. 0.0423mm. Adjustment of secondary PPC/ 138 M When the value scanning direction reproPRT <0-255> increases by “1”, the duction ratio (fine adjustreproduction ratio of FAX 139 M ment of main motor speed) secondary scanning <0-255> direction increases by approx. 0.04%. Fine adjustment of exit PPC/ 107 M When the value motor speed PRT <0-255> increases by “1”, the rotation becomes faster FAX 121 M by approx. 0.05%. <0-255> PPC 0 M When the value Top margin adjustment <0-255> increases by “1”, the (blank area at the leading blank area becomes edge of the paper) wider by approx. Left margin adjustment PPC 0 M 0.0423mm. (blank area at the left of the <0-255> paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PPC 0 M When the value (blank area at the right of <0-255> increases by “1”, the the paper along the paper blank area becomes feeding direction) wider by approx. 0.0423 mm. Bottom margin adjustment PPC 0 M (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper) M Bottom margin adjustment PPC/ EUR: 48 (blank area at the trailing PRT UC:24 edge of the paper)/ JPN: 24 Reverse side at duplexing Others: 48 <0-255> Right margin adjustment PPC/ 12 M (blank area at the right of PRT <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction)/Reverse side at duplexing PRT 24 M Top margin adjustment <0-255> (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the left of the <0-255> paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the right of <0-255> the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PRT 0 M (blank area at the trailing <0-255> edge of the paper)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 68 07/11
Code
Classification
440
Laser
441 442
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 7 M When the value Adjustment of Upper drawer <0-15> increases by “1”, the secondary image shifts toward the scanning Lower ALL 24 M leading edge of the laser writing drawer <0-40> paper by approx. start position Bypass ALL 8 M 0.2mm. feeding <0-15>
443
LCF
ALL
444
PFP
ALL
445
Duplex feeding Long size Middle size Short size 1
ALL
448-0
Paper feeding
448-1 448-2
449-0
Paper feeding
449-1 449-2
450-0
Paper feeding
450-1 450-2 452-0
Paper feeding
452-1 452-2 455-0
Paper feeding
455-1 455-2
457
Paper feeding
Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Plain paper) Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle the registrasize tion section Short (PFP lower size drawer / Plain paper) Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle the registrasize tion section Short (Upper drawer size / Plain paper) Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle the registrasize tion section Short (Lower drawer size / Plain paper) Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle the registrasize tion section Short (Duplex feed- size ing / Plain paper) Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Plain paper)
ALL ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 1 1
2 1
8 <0-15> 8 <0-15> 8 <0-15> 10 <0-63> 10 <0-63> 8 <0-63>
M
1
M
1
M
1
10 <0-63> 10 <0-63> 8 <0-63>
M
M
4
17 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 17 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
12 <0-63> 10 <0-63> 10 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 30 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
8 <0-63>
M
1
M M M
M
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter
4 4 4
4 4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 69 07/11
Code 458-0
Classification Paper feeding
458-1 458-2
460-0
Paper feeding
460-1 460-2
461-0
Paper feeding
461-1 461-2
462-0
Paper feeding
462-1 462-2 462-3 463-0
Paper feeding
463-1 463-2 466-0 466-1 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 26 M When the value Paper aligning Long size <0-63> increases by “1”, the amount aligning amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M increases by approx. the registrasize <0-63> 0.8 mm. tion section Short ALL 25 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> Long size: ing/Plain 330 mm or longer paper) Middle size: Paper aligning Long ALL 26 M 220 mm to 329 mm size <0-63> amount Short size: adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M 219 mm or shorter the registrasize <0-63> * Postcard is suption section Short ALL 26 M ported only for JPN (Bypass feed- size <0-63> model. ing/Thick paper 1) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick paper 2) ALL 17 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 17 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 17 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/Thick Post ALL 14 M paper 3) card <0-63> ALL 26 M Paper aligning Long size <0-63> amount adjustment at Middle ALL 26 M the registrasize <0-63> tion section Short ALL 26 M (Bypass feed- size <0-63> ing/OHP film) ALL 143 M When the value Adjustment of Plain paper <0-255> increases by “1”, the paper pushdriving speed of bypass ing amount / Post card ALL 173 M feed roller increases by Bypass feed<0-255> approx. 0.2 ms when ing Thick ALL 143 M the paper transport is paper 1 <0-255> started from the regisThick ALL 143 M tration section. paper 2 <0-255> * Post card is supThick ALL 143 M ported only for JPN paper 3 <0-255> model. OHP film ALL 128 M <0-255>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 70 07/11
Code 467
468-0
Classification Paper feeding
Finisher
468-1 468-2 469-0
Paper feeding
469-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of paper pushALL 128 M When the value ing amount/Duplex feed<0-255> increases by “1”, the ing (short size) driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. A4-R/LT-R ALL 0 M When the value Fine adjust<-14-14> increases by “1”, the ment of bindbinding/folding position ing position/ B4 ALL 0 M shifts toward the right folding posi<-14-14> page by 0.25 mm. tion A3/LD ALL 0 M Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer)
469-2
469-3
469-4
469-5
470-0
Paper feeding
470-1 470-2
471-0 471-1 471-2
Paper feeding
Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Thick paper 1)
Thick Paper 1 Long size Thick Paper 1 Middle size Thick Paper 1 Short size Thick Paper 2 Long size Thick Paper 2 Middle size Thick Paper 2 Short size Long size Middle size Short size Long size Middle size Short size
ALL
<-14-14> 20 <0-63>
M
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size: 219 mm or shorter
Procedur e 1
2
4 4 4 4
ALL
20 <0-63>
M
ALL
20 <0-63>
M
ALL
20 <0-63>
M
4
ALL
22 <0-63>
M
4
ALL
19 <0-63>
M
4
ALL
20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
20 <0-63> 22 <0-63> 19 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 71 07/11
Code 472-0
Classification Paper feeding
472-1 472-2
473
Paper feeding
474-0
Paper feeding
474-1 474-2
497-0
Laser
497-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 20 M When the value Paper aligning Long size <0-63> increases by "1", the amount aligning amount adjustment at Middle ALL 22 M increases by approx. the registrasize <0-63> 0.8 mm. tion section Short ALL 19 M (PFP lower size <0-63> Long size: drawer / Thick 330 mm or longer paper 1) Middle size: ALL 8 M Paper aligning amount 220 mm to 329 mm adjustment at the registra<0-63> Short size: tion section (LCF / Thick 219 mm or shorter paper 1) Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Duplex feeding / Thick paper 1) Adjustment of drawer sideways deviation
497-2 497-3 497-4 497-5 498-0
Laser
498-1
501
Image
503 504 505 506 507
Image
Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position at duplex feeding Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density” /Center value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density” /Light step value
Long size Middle size Short size
ALL
Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF
ALL
Bypass feeding Long size
ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
Short size(A4/LT or smaller)
ALL
Photo
PPC
Text/Photo
PPC
Text
PPC
Text/Photo
PPC
Photo
PPC
Text
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 4 4 4
1
24 <0-63> 24 <0-63> 33 <0-63>
M
4
M
4
M
4
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 148 <0-255>
M
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255>
SYS
M M
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
1 1 1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 72 07/11
Code
Classification
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514 515 532
Image
533 534 570
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Text/Photo PPC EUR: 20 SYS When the value Density UC: 20 increases, the image of adjustment JPN : 30 the “dark” steps Fine adjust<0-255> becomes darker. ment of “manual density” Photo PPC EUR: 24 SYS /Dark step UC: 24 value JPN: 24 <0-255> Text PPC EUR: 20 SYS UC: 20 JPN: 27 <0-255> Photo PPC 128 SYS When the value Density <0-255> increases, the image adjustment Fine adjustText/Photo PPC 128 SYS becomes darker. ment of “auto<0-255> matic density” Text PPC 128 SYS <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 SYS When the value tion / Back<0-255> increases, the background peak Photo PPC 16 SYS ground becomes more adjustment brightened. <0-255> Text
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original manually set on the original glass
PPC PPC
571
Photo
PPC
572
Text
PPC
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
64 <0-255> EUR: 12 UC: 12 JPN: 22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 22 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedur e 1
1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”.Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 73 07/11
2
Code
Classification
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
596-0
Image
596-1
Image
596-2
Image
597-0
Image
597-1
Image
597-2
Image
598-0
Image
598-1
Image
598-2
Image
599-0
Image
599-1
Image
599-2
Image
620
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 1 Gamma data Text/Photo PPC 0 SYS One’s place: slope adjust<0-99> 0:Equivalent to the set ment value 5 Photo PPC 0 SYS 1 1 to 9: Select the slope <0-99> of Gamma curve Text PPC 0 SYS 1 (The larger the <0-99> value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Ten’s place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value 4 Low PRT 128 SYS When the value Gamma baldensity <0-255> increases, the density ance adjustment Medium PRT 128 SYS in the target area 4 becomes higher. (PS/Photo) density <0-255> High PRT 128 SYS 4 density <0-255> Gamma balLow PRT 128 SYS When the value 4 ance adjustdensity <0-255> increases, the density ment Medium PRT 128 SYS in the target area 4 (PS/Text) becomes higher. density <0-255> High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Text/Photo
PPC
621
Photo
PPC
2 <0-99>
SYS
622
Text
PPC
EUR: 45 UC: 45 JPN: 45 <0-99>
SYS
Gamma balance adjustment (PCL/Photo)
Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Detail)
Sharpness adjustment
PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 1 <0-99>
SYS SYS SYS
4 When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher.
SYS SYS SYS
4 4
When the value increases, the density in the target area becomes higher.
SYS SYS
4
4 4 4
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes.One’s place: Fixed value (05-620 is “1”, 05-621 is “2”, 05622 is “5”) Ten’s place: Sharpness intensity (0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity)
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 74 07/11
Code
Classification
648
Image
654
Image
655
672-0
Image
672-1 672-2
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC 208 SYS Adjusts the level of the smudged/faint <0-255> smudged/faint text text.With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. PS PRT 5 SYS Adjustment of the Adjustment of smudged/faint <0-9> smudged/faint text PCL PRT 5 SYS text.With decreasing the value, the faint text <0-9> is suppressed, and with increasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. PRT 0 M Adjustment of the Adjustment of Normal <0-10> image density.With printer image decreasing the value, density PRT 4 M the text becomes <0-10> lighter. PRT 5 M
672-3
PRT
672-4
PRT
676-0
Image
Toner saving
PRT
676-1
PRT
676-2
PRT
676-3
PRT
676-4
PRT
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
<0-10> 6 <0-10> 10 <0-10> 0 <0-10> 4 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 6 <0-10> 6 <0-10>
Procedur e 1
2
1 1
4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 75 07/11
Code
Classification
693
Image
694
695
700
Image
701
702
710
Image
714 715
Image
719
720
724
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 1 Range correc- Text/Photo PPC EUR: 12 SYS Sets whether the values of the background tion on origiUC: 12 peak and text peak are nal set on the JPN: 22 fixed or not. One’s RADF <11-14, place is an adjustment 21-24, for “automatic density” 31-34, and ten’s place is for 41-44> “manual density”. Once SYS they are fixed, the 1 Photo PPC 12 range correction is per<11-14, formed with standard 21-24, values. 31-34, The values of the back41-44> ground peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the backSYS ground density and text 1 Text PPC 22 density respectively. <11-14, 1: fixed/fixed 21-24, 2: varied/fixed 31-34, 3: fixed/varied 41-44> 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Adjustment of Center FAX 120 SYS When the value 1 binarized value <0-255> increases, the image at threshold the center step (Text) becomes lighter. Light step FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 value <0-255> increases, the image of “light” side becomes lighter. Dark step FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 value <0-255> increases, the image of “dark” side becomes darker. Density Photo FAX 128 SYS When the value 1 adjustment <0-255> increases, the image at Fine adjustthe center step ment of “man- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS becomes darker. 1 ual density”/ <0-255> Center value Photo FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 Density <0-255> increases, the image of adjustment the “light” steps Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS becomes lighter. 1 ual density”/ <0-255> Light step value Photo FAX 20 SYS When the value 1 Density <0-255> increases, the image of adjustment the “dark” steps Fine adjustment of “man- Text/Photo FAX 20 SYS becomes darker. 1 ual density”/ <0-255> Dark step value
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 76 07/11
Code
Classification
725
Image
729
825
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Photo FAX 128 SYS When the value Density <0-255> increases, the image adjustment becomes darker. Fine adjustment of “auto- Text/Photo FAX 128 SYS matic density <0-255> Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original manually set on the original glass
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
826
Text
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
827
Photo
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
SCN
12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44>
SYS
830
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original set on the RADF
831
Text
SCN
832
Photo
SCN
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Sets whether the value of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 77 07/11
2
Code
Classification
835
Image
836
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 48 SYS When the value tion / Back<0-255> increases, the background peak Text SCN 48 SYS ground becomes more adjustment brightened. <0-255>
837 845
Image
846 847 850
Image
851 852 855
Image
856 857
860 861 862
Image
Photo
SCN
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Center value
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ adjustment/ Dark step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “automatic density”
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
Text/Photo
SCN
Text
SCN
Photo
SCN
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
40 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255>
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
SYS SYS
1 1
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS SYS
1
1
SYS SYS
Procedur e
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1 1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 78 07/11
Code
Classification
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
913
Image
914
Image
915
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 4 Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS When the value justment(Text/ tion ratio <0-99> increases, the image Photo) 40% or becomes sharper. smaller When the value Reproduc- SCN 1 SYS decreases, the image 4 becomes softer. The tion ratio <0-99> smaller the value is, the 41-80% 1 SYS less the moire 4 Reproduc- SCN becomes. tion ratio <0-99> One’s place: Fixed 81% or value (05-865 is “1”, larger 05-866 is “2”, 05-867 is Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS “5”) Ten’s place: Sharp4 <0-99> justment(Text) tion ratio ness intensity (0: Use 40% or default value, 1-9: Filter smaller intensity) 2 SYS 4 Reproduc- SCN <0-99> tion ratio 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 2 SYS 4 tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger Sharpnessad- Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS 4 justtion ratio <0-99> ment(Photo) 40% or smaller Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS 4 tion ratio <0-99> 41-80% Reproduc- SCN 5 SYS 4 tion ratio <0-99> 81% or larger 1 Custom PPC EUR: 12 SYS Set whether the values Range correcof the background peak Mode 1 UC: 12 tion on origiand text peak are fixed JPN: 22 nal manually or not. One's place is <11-14, set on the an adjustment for 21-24, original glass “automatic density” and 31-34, ten's place is for “man41-44> SYS ual density”. Once they 1 Custom PPC 22 are fixed, the range Mode 2 <11-14, correction is per21-24, formed with standard 31-34, values. 41-44> SYS The values of the back1 Custom PPC 12 ground peak and text Mode 3 <11-14, peak affect the repro21-24, duction of the back31-34, ground density and text 41-44> density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 79 07/11
2
Code
Classification
916
Image
917
Image
918
Image
919
Image
920
Image
921
Image
922
Image
923
Image
924
Image
928
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default ProFunc- 1 Range correcCustom PPC EUR: 12 SYS Set whether the values of the background peak tion on origiMode 1 UC: 12 and text peak are fixed nal set on the JPN: 22 or not. One's place is RADF <11-14, an adjustment for 21-24, “automatic density” and 31-34, ten's place is for “man41-44> SYS ual density”. Once they 1 Custom PPC 22 are fixed, the range Mode 2 <11-14, correction is per21-24, formed with standard 31-34, values. 41-44> Custom PPC 12 SYS The values of the back1 ground peak and text Mode 3 <11-14, peak affect the repro21-24, duction of the back31-34, ground density and text 41-44> density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Range correcCustom PPC 40 SYS When the value 1 tion BackMode 1 <0-255> increases, the background peak Custom PPC 64 SYS ground becomes more 1 adjustment brightened. Mode 2 <0-255> Custom PPC 16 SYS 1 Mode 3 <0-255> 1 Sharpness Custom PPC 1 SYS When the value adjustment Mode 1 <0-99> increases, the image Custom PPC EUR: 45 SYS becomes sharper. 1 When the value Mode 2 UC: 45 decreases, the image JPN: 45 becomes softer. The <0-99> Custom PPC 2 SYS smaller the value is, the 1 less the moire Mode 3 <0-99> becomes. One's place: Fixed value (05-922 is "1", 05-923 is "5", 05-924 is "2")Ten's place: Sharpness intensity(0: Use default value, 1-9: Filter intensity) Adjustment of Custom PPC 2 SYS Adjustment of the 1 smudged/faint Mode 1 <0-4> smudged/faint text. text With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 80 07/11
Code
Classification
931
Image
932
Image
933
Image
934
Image
935 936 937
Image
938 939 940
Image
941 942 943
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density Custom PPC 128 SYS When the value adjustment Mode 1 <0-255> increases, the image of Fine adjustCustom PPC 128 SYS the center step ment of "manbecomes darker. Mode 2 <0-255> ual density"/ Custom PPC 128 SYS Center value Mode 3 <0-255> Density adjustment Fine adjustment of "manual density"/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of "manual density"/ Dark step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of "automatic density" Gamma data slope adjustment
Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1
PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC
20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255>
SYS
20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255>
SYS
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <0-99>
SYS
SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
Custom Mode 2
PPC
0 <0-99>
SYS
945
Custom Mode 3
PPC
0 <0-99>
SYS
Equipment number (serial number) entry
ALL
-
SYS
Maintenance
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
When the value increases, the image of the "Dark" step density becomes lighter.
1
2 1 1 1
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
SYS SYS
1
1
SYS
944
976
When the value increases, the image of the "light" step density becomes lighter.
Procedur e
1 1 1
One’s place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of Gammacurve (The larger the value is, the larger the slope becomes.) Ten’s place: 0: Equivalent to the set value 5 1 to 9: Select the slope of low density (The smaller the value is, the darker the background becomes.) 00: Use default value When this adjustment is performed with this code, the setting code (08-995) is also performed automatically (10 digits)
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 81 07/11
2.2.7
Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO350/450)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][8] [POWER]
[START]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
[ENTER] or [Digital key] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 82 05/12
Procedure 5 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] *[HELP] Sets or changes value
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
2
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Setting)
[ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 9 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] [ENTER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Digital key] (2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] or [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 83
Procedure 14 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Adjustment value cannot be changed
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. e-STUDIO350/450: In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. "M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board and "NIC" stands for the NIC board. Setting mode (08) Default Func- Date and time setting ALL <13 digits>
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User interface
Counter installed externally
ALL
203
General
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
204
User interface
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3 <0-10>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 2 <0-2> 0 <0-3>
M
M
Contents
Procedur e
Year/month/date/day/ hour/minute/second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 “Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from “1” to “6”. 0: EUR 1: UC 2: JPN
5
0: No external counter 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card (This value is valid only when “2” is set to 08-201.) 3: Key copy counter 0: For factory shipment 1: For line * Field: “0” must be selected Timer to return the equipment to the default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec.
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 84 07/05
Code 205
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SYS Auto power save mode ALL EUR: 11 timer setting UC: 11 JPN: 6 Others:11 <0, 6-15>
206
User interface
Auto Shut Off Mode timer setting (Auto Shut Off Mode / Sleep Mode)
ALL
Refer to content <0-20>
SYS
207
User interface
Highlighting display on LCD
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
209
User interface Paper feeding
Default setting of filing format when E-mailing Paper size (A6-R) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
SYS
216
Paper feeding
Tab paper print Tab width setting (Bypass feeding)
ALL
217
Paper feeding User interface
Tab paper print Tab width setting (Bypass feeding) Default setting of filing format when storing files
ALL
1 <0-1> 148/105 <148432/105297> 130 <100200> 1300 <0-3000> 0 <0-3>
210
219
PRT
SCN
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents Timer to automatically switch to the Auto power save mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. Timer to turn OFF the power or to enter the Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min.11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17:180min. 18: 210min. 19:240min. 20: Not used e-STUDIO350 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 9 Others: 9 e-STUDIO450 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 12 Others: 12 0: Black letter on white background 1: White letter on black background 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
M
10
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single)
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 85 04/09
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Language displayed at ALL EUR: 0 SYS power-ON UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6>
220
User interface
221
User interface
Language selection in UI data at Web power ON
ALL
EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6>
SYS
224
Paper feeding Paper feeding
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
UNDEF
SYS
Paper size for upper drawer
ALL
M
226
Paper feeding
Paper size for lower drawer
ALL
227
Paper feeding
Paper size for PFP upper drawer
ALL
228
Paper feeding
Paper size for PFP lower drawer
ALL
229
Paper feeding
Paper size (A3) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
230
Paper feeding
Paper size (A4-R) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
231
Paper feeding
Paper size (A5-R) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
232
Paper feeding
Paper size (B4) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
233
Paper feeding
Paper size (B5-R) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
234
Paper feeding
Paper size (LT-R) feeding/width wise direction
ALL
EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4 EUR: A3 UC: LD JPN: A3 EUR: A4-R UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R EUR: A4 UC: LG JPN: B4 420/297 <182432/140297> 297/210 <182432/140297> 210/148 <182432/140297> 364/257 <182432/140297> 257/182 <182432/140297> 279/216 <182432/140297>
225
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
Procedur e 1
1
9 9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 86 04/09
Code
Classification
235
Paper feeding
236
Paper feeding
237
Paper feeding
238
Paper feeding
239
Paper feeding
240
Paper feeding
241
Paper feeding
242
Paper feeding
243
Paper feeding
244
Paper feeding
245
Paper feeding
247
Paper feeding
248
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Paper size (LD) ALL 432/279 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (LG) ALL 356/216 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (ST-R) ALL 216/140 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (FOLIO) ALL 330/210 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 330/216 M Paper size (13”LG) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 216/216 M Paper size (8.5”X8.5”) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 432/279 SYS Paper size (Non-standard) <148feeding/width wise direc432/105tion 297> ALL 148/100 SYS Memory 1 <148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type) 297> feeding/width wise direction Paper size (8K) ALL 390/270 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (16K-R) ALL 270/195 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 148/100 SYS Memory 2 <148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type) 297> feeding/width wise direction Memory 3 ALL 148/100 SYS Paper size (bypass feed<148ing/non-standard type) 432/100feeding/width wise direc297> tion
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 1].
10
10
10
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 2].
10
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 3].
10
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 87 04/09
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 148/100 SYS Memory 4 <148Paper size (bypass feed432/100ing/non-standard type) 297> feeding/width wise direction Service technician teleALL 0 SYS phone number <32 digits>
249
Paper feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM counter
ALL
Refer to content <8 digits>
M
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
253
Maintenance Paper feeding
Error history display
ALL
-
SYS
LT↔A4/LD↔A3
PRT
0 <0-1>
SYS
255
Paper feeding
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0 <0-4>
M
256
Paper feeding
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
M
257
Counter
Counter copy
ALL
EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4 <1-2>
254
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
Contents
Procedur e
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 4].
10
A telephone number can be entered up to 32 digits. Use the [MONITOR/ PAUSE] button to enter a hyphen(-). e-STUDIO350 UC, EUR: 120000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO450 UC, EUR: 150000 JPN: 0 Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. Displays the latest 20 errors data Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) 0: Automatic 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed Press the icon on the LCD to select the size.
11
1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter (P. 2-241)
-
1
1
2 1
1
9
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 88 06/01
Code 258
Classification Maintenance
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FSMS acceptance ALL 1 SYS <0-2>
PRT
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
1
SYS
Sets the file retention level when editing the files in the Electronic Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution). 0: Not full retained 1: Fully retained Retains the source file until CutDoc/SaveDoc command is completed. * The file is not deleted even if the HDD has become full during the execution of command when "1" is set. Sets the data retention period when creating a user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day)
1
260
Network
Storage period at trail and private Web data retention period
263
User interface
Administrator's password (Maximum 10 digits)
ALL
123456 <10 digits>
-
264
Network
File retention period
SCN
SYS
265
Network
SCN
266
Network
267
Electronic filing
Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX Full guarantee of documents in Electronic Filing when HDD is full
30 <0-999> 30 <2-30> 30 <2-30> 0 <0-1>
270
Electronic filing
Default setting of user box retention period
ALL
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-999>
1
SYS
Network
ALL
Procedur e
Sets whether the FSMS connection is accepted or not. 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (serial connection only) 2: Accepted (both serial and USB connections) 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days When a certain period of time has passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) The password can be entered in alphabets and figures (A-Z, a-z and 0-9) within 10 digits. 0: No limits 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days 2 to 30 M bytes
259
SCN
14 <0-30> 10 <3 digits>
Contents
SYS SYS
SYS
2
1 1
11
1 1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 89 05/11
Code
Classification
271
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Warning display of the ALL 90 SYS HDD capacity to be filled <0-100>
272
Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit
ALL
3 <0-99>
SYS
273
Scanning Default setting of partial size when transmitting Email
ALL
0 <0-6>
SYS
274
FAX
Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX
ALL
0 <0-4>
SYS
276
User interface
Default setting of density adjustment
SCN
0 <0-11>
SYS
281
User interface
Default setting of resolution
SCN
1 <0-4>
SYS
283
User interface
Default setting of original mode
SCN
0 <0-2>
SYS
284
User interface
Default setting of scanning mode
SCN
0 <0-2>
SYS
285
User interface
Default setting of rotation mode
SCN
0 <0-3>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Sets the percentage of the HDD capacity filled which warning is displayed 0 to 100: 0 to 100% Sets the days left the notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days Sets the default value for the partial size of Email to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 (Unit: KB) 0: Automatic density 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi 0: Text 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 0: Single 1: Book 2: Tablet 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 90 05/11
Code 286
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of original SCN 0 SYS paper size <0-22>
288
General
Searching interval of deleting expired files
ALL
12 <1-24>
SYS
290
Network
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
SYS
291
Network
Raw printing job (Paper size)
PRT
1 <0-1> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0 -13>
292
Network
Raw printing job (Paper type)
PRT
0 <0-4>
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
295
Network
Raw printing job (receiving tray)
PRT
0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-5>
SYS
294
Raw printing job (Paper direction) Raw printing job (Staple)
296
Network
Raw printing job (Number of form lines)
PRT
1200 <50012800>
SYS
297
Network
Raw printing job (PCL font pitch)
PRT
1000 <449999>
SYS
PRT
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS SYS
Contents 0: Automatic 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed20: 8K 21: 16K 22: 16K-R Sets the search interval of expired files. Deletes if expired file is found. (Unit: Hour) 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film 0: Portrait 1: Landscape 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Inner tray 1: Finisher tray 1 2: Finisher tray 2 3: Not used 4: Job Separator upper tray 5: Job Separator lower tray* The settings 4 and 5 are effective only when the Job Separator (MJ-5004) is installed. Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128. (A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) Sets the font pitch from 0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.)
Procedur e 1
2
1
1 1
1
1 1 1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 91 04/05
Code
Classification
298
Network
299
Network
300
User interface User interface
302
305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 305-9 305-10 305-11 305-12 305-13 305-14 305-15 305-16 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 306-10 306-11 306-12 306-13 306-14 306-15 306-16
Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Raw printing job PRT 1200 SYS (PCL font size) <40099975>
Raw printing job (PCL font number) Maximum number of copy volume (MAX9) Original counter display
Number of A3 output pages A4 in copier func- A5 tion A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others Number of A3 output pages A4 in Printer A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
PRT PPC PPC
0 <0-79> 0 <0-2> EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0, 2>
SYS SYS SYS
PPC
0 <8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0 <8 digits>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Sets the font size from 4 to 999.75. (A hundredfold of the font size is defined as the setting value.) Sets the PCL font number. 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed Counts the output pages in the copier function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).
Counts the output pages in the printer function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).
Procedur e 1
1 1 1
4
4
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 92
Code 307-0 307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4 307-5 307-6 307-7 307-8 307-9 307-10 307-11 307-12 307-13 307-14 307-15 307-16 308-0 308-1 308-2 308-3 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 308-9 308-10 308-11 308-12 308-13 308-14 308-15 308-16
Classification Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of A3 PRT 0 SYS output pages A4 <8 digits> at List Print A5 Mode A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS output pages A4 <8 digits> in FAX Func- A5 tion A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e
Counts the output pages at the List Print Mode for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).
4
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 93
Code 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 312-10 312-11 312-12 312-13 312-14 312-15 312-16 313-0 313-1 313-2 313-3 313-4 313-5 313-6 313-7 313-8 313-9 313-10 313-11 313-12 313-13 313-14 313-15 313-16
Classification Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- A3 PPC 0 SYS Number of <8 digits> scanning A4 pages in A5 Copier FuncA6 tion B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 SCN 0 SYS Number of <8 digits> scanning A4 pages in A5 Scanning A6 Function B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Procedur e
Counts the scanning pages in the Copier Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largesized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).
4
Counts the scanning pages in the Scanning Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08353).
4
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 94
Code 314-0 314-1 314-2 314-3 314-4 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 314-9 314-10 314-11 314-12 314-13 314-14 314-15 314-16 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 315-10 315-11 315-12 315-13 315-14 315-15 315-16
Classification Counter
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS scanning <8 digits> A4 pages in FAX A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS transmitted <8 digits> A4 pages in FAX A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e
Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).
4
Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).
4
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 95
Code
Classification
316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 316-10 316-11 316-12 316-13 316-14 316-15 316-16 320-0
Counter
Counter
320-1
Counter
320-2
Counter
321-0
Counter
321-1
Counter
321-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of A3 FAX 0 SYS received <8 digits> A4 pages in FAX A5 Function A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others Large PPC 0 SYS Display of <8 digits> number of output pages Small PPC 0 SYS in Copier <8 digits> Function Total PPC 0 SYS <8 digits>
Display of number of output pages in Printer Function
Large
PRT
Small
PRT
Total
PRT
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS SYS SYS
Contents
Procedur e
Counts the received pages in the FAX Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353).
4
Counts the number of output pages in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages in the Printer Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
14 14 14
14 14 14
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 96
Code
Classification
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
322-2
Counter
323-0
Counter
323-1
Counter
323-2
Counter
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
327-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Large PRT 0 SYS Display of <8 digits> number of output pages Small PRT 0 SYS at List Print <8 digits> Mode Total PRT 0 SYS <8 digits>
Display of number of output pages in FAX Function
Display of number of scanning pages in Copier Function
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
PPC
Small
PPC
Total
PPC
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Contents Counts the number of output pages at the List Print Mode Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
Procedur e 14 14
2 14
14 14 14
14 14 14
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 97
Code
Classification
328-0
Counter
328-1
Counter
328-2
Counter
329-0
Counter
329-1
Counter
329-2
Counter
330-0
Counter
330-1
Counter
330-2
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Large FAX 0 SYS Display of <8 digits> number of scanning Small FAX 0 SYS pages in FAX <8 digits> Function Total FAX 0 SYS <8 digits>
Display of number of scanning pages in Scanning Function
Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX Function
Large
SCN
Small
SCN
Total
SCN
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Contents Counts the number of scanning pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
Procedur e 14 14 14
14 14 14
14 14 14
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 98
Code 331
Classification User interface
332-0
Counter
332-1
Counter
332-2
Counter
335-0
Counter
335-1
Counter
335-2
Counter
344
Counter
346
Counter
347
Counter
348
Counter
349
Counter
352
Counter
353
Counter
356
Counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of screen ALL 0 SYS <0-3>
Display of number of received pages in FAX Function
Display of total number of pages
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
Total
FAX
Large
ALL
Small
ALL
Total
ALL
Count setting of tab paper (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (PM) Definition setting of largesized paper (PM) Count setting of thick paper (PM) Count setting of OHP film (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter for upper drawer feeding
ALL ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> JPN: 0 OTHER: 1 <0-2>
SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS
Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box Counts the number of received pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Displays the total number of pages in the Copier/Printer/Scanning/FAX Functions.
SYS M M M
M M M
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents
Procedur e 1
2
14 14 14
14 14 14
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
Counted as 1 Counted as 2 Counted as 1 Counted as 2 A3/LD A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double counter) 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP/8k Counts the number of sheets fed from upper drawer
1 1 1
1 1 1
1
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 99 04/10
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Counter for lower drawer ALL 0 M feeding <8 digits>
Code
Classification
357
Counter
358
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
359
Counter
Counter for LCF feeding
ALL
M
360
Counter
Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
370
Counter
Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
SYS
381
Counter
Setting for counter installed externally
ALL
0 <8 digits> 1 <0-7>
390
Counter
PPC
Counter
392
Counter
393
Counter
398
Laser
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS
391
Number of errors in HDD (Copier) Number of errors in HDD (FAX) Number of errors in HDD (Scanning) Number of errors in HDD (Printer) Number of polygonal motor rotational speed switching
399
Laser
Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation
FAX SCN PRT ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <8 digits>
M
M
SYS
Contents Counts the number of sheets fed from lower drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass feed Counts the number of sheets fed from LCF Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower drawer Counts the number of output pages of duplex printing. Counts the number of originals fed from RADF Selects the job to count up for the external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX The number of error is reset at HDD formatting.
Procedur e 2
2
2 2
2
2
2 1
2 2
SYS
2
SYS
2
M
M
Counts the number of time the polygonal motor has switched its rotational speed between normal rotation and standby rotation Accumulates the time the polygonal motor has rotated at normal rotation.
2
2
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 100 04/01
Code
Classification
400
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fuser unit error status ALL 0 M counter <0-19>
409
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature at a energy saver mode (Center thermistor)
ALL
0 <0-13>
M
410
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Plain paper)
ALL
12 <0-14>
M
411
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature on standby (Center thermistor)
ALL
12 <0-12>
M
412
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 3)
ALL
12 <0-14>
M
413
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 1)
ALL
12 <0-14>
M
414
Developer
Toner density correctionsetting
ALL
0 <0-8>
M
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: No error 1: C411(Once) 2: C410(consecutively occurred) 3: 4: 5: C440 6: C450 7: C440 8: C450 9: C440 10: C470 11: C470 12: C480 13: C480 14: C470 15: C480 16: C490 17: C470 18: C480 19: C490 0: OFF 1: 40°C 2: 50°C 3: 60°C 4: 70°C 5: 80°C 6: 90°C 7: 100°C 8: 110°C 9: 120°C 10: 130°C 11: 140°C 12: 150°C 13: 160°C 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 1: 140°C 1: 145°C 3: 150°C 4: 155°C 5: 160°C 6: 165°C 7: 170°C 8: 175°C 9: 180°C 10: 185°C 11: 190°C 12: 195°C 13: 200°C 14: 210°C 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 210°C 0: Invalid 1: +3bit 2: +6bit 3: +9bit 4: +12bit 5: -3bit 6: -6bit 7: -9bit 8: -12bit
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 101
Code
Classification
417
Fuser
419
Image Processing
420
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M printing (Thick paper 3) <0-15>
Black band pattern between sheets of paper
ALL
0 <0-20>
M
Fuser
Pre-running time at warming-up
ALL
JPN: 3 UC: 4 EUR: 4 <0-10>
M
437
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor /Thick paper 2)
ALL
12 <0-14>
M
438
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/OHP film)
ALL
12 <0-14>
M
439
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0 <0-15>
M
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Sets whether or not a black band pattern is formed on the drum between two sheets of paper being transported. 0: Invalid 1 to 20: Black band width (Unit: mm) 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec.
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 102
Code
Classification
440
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Pre-running time for first ALL 0 M printing <0-15> (Plain paper)
441
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 1)
ALL
0 <0-15>
M
455
Image processing
Toner supply amount correction setting
ALL
0 <0-2>
M
462
RADF
Setting for switchback operation to copy mixedsized original on RADF
ALL
0<0-1>
SYS
463-0
Paper feeding
Feeding retry number setting (upper drawer)
Plain paper Others
ALL
M
Feeding retry number setting (lower drawer)
Plain paper Others
5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5> 5 <0-5>
463-1 464-0 464-1
Paper feeding
ALL ALL ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M M M
Contents 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Corrects the period of the toner motor rotation time during toner supply. 0: 100% 1: 90% 2: 80% Sets whether or not detecting the original length by transporting without scanning in reverse when finding A4-R/FOLIO paper. 0: Invalid- Judges as A4-R without trans porting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Valid- Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO size by transporting in reverse with no scanning. * The original is transported in reverse with no scanning when detecting LT-LG size-paper in LT, regardless of this setting. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer.
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
4 4 4 4
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 103 05/05
Code 465-0
Classification Paper feeding
465-1 466-0
Paper feeding
466-1 467-0
Paper feeding
467-1 468-0
Paper feeding
468-1 469
Fan
471
Paper feeding
472
Fan
478
Laser
479
Laser
480
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M upper drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (PFP Others ALL 5 M lower drawer) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (bypass Others ALL 5 M feed) <0-5> Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 M number setpaper <0-5> ting (LCF) Others ALL 5 M <0-5> Speed switching for subALL 0 M separation fan <0-1> ALL 148/100 M Paper size (Post card) <148feeding/width wise direc432/100tion 297> Speed switching for midALL 0 M dle fan <0-1> Judged number of polygoALL 0 M nal motor rotation error <0-1> (Normal rotation)
Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (At acceleration/deceleration)
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
Default setting of paper source
PPC
0 <0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. 0: High speed 1: Low speed * Post card is supported only for JPN model. 0: High speed 1: Low speed Displays the error [CA10] when the set number of rotation error has been detected. 0: 2 times 1: 12 times 0: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 0.6 sec. 1: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 2.2 sec. 0: A4/LT 1: LCF 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer
Procedur e 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 10
1 1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 104 05/05
Code 481
482
Classification Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Automatic change of paper PPC 1 SYS source <0-2>
483
Paper feeding Laser
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor
ALL
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear Mode
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
485
Laser
Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-1> 0 <0-2>
M SYS
Contents Sets whether or not changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. “1” is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) 0: ON 1: OFF Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-490.)1: Stopped
Procedur e 1
2
1 1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 105
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Timing of auto-clearing of ALL 0 SYS polygonal motor pre-run<0-2> ning rotation
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
Setting of polygonal motor type
ALL
3 <2-3>
M
489
Laser
Polygonal motor rotation number on standby
ALL
5 <0-5>
M
490
Laser
ALL
Transfer
0 <0-1> 165 <0-255>
M
491
Polygonal motor rotation in the energy saving mode Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
492
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H) at duplexing
ALL
106 <0-255>
M
493
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (L) at duplexing
ALL
128 <0-255>
M
502
Image
Error diffusion and dither setting at photo mode
PPC
1 <0-1>
SYS
503
User interface Image
Default setting of density adjustment Custom Mode setting
PPC
0 <0-1> 0 <0-3>
SYS
508
ALL
PPC
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
SYS
Contents Switches the polygonal motor to the standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the prerunning. At this code, the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is effective when “0” or “2” is set at 08-483. Set the type of polygonal motor. 2: 2 clock type 3: 3 clock type 0: 38090.55rpm 1: 35000rpm 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm 0: Stopped 1: 10000rpm Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper at duplexing. Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the center area of paper at duplexing. Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the trailing edge area of paper at duplexing. Sets the image reproduction method at photo mode. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 0: Automatic 1: Manual (Center) 0: Not used 1: Custom Mode 1 when Text/Photo is set as a base 2: Custom Mode 2 when Text is set as a base 3: Custom Mode 3 when Photo is set as a base
Procedur e 1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1 1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 106 04/05
Code
Classification
509
Image
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Error diffusion and dither PPC 1 SYS setting at a photo mode <0-1> (Custom Mode)
526
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film)
ALL
6 <0-15>
M
550
Image
Default setting of Original mode
PPC
0 <0-3>
SYS
601
User interface User interface
Setting for the EnergySaving Mode Screen setting for Auto power Save Mode and Auto Shut OFF Mode
ALL
SYS
603
User interface
Setting for automatic duplexing mode
ALL
0 <0-1> EUR:0 UC:1 JPN:1 <0-1> 0 <0-3>
604
User interface
Default setting for APS/ AMS
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
605
User interface
PPC
1 <0-1>
SYS
607
User interface
Centering printing of primary/secondary direction at AMS Default setting of RADF mode
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
610
User interface User interface
Key touch sound of control panel Book type original priority
ALL
SYS
PPC
1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
General
Summer time mode
ALL
602
611
612
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents Switches the image processing method when Custom Mode 3 is set. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 3: Custom Mode 0: Auto Shut Off Mode 1: Sleep Mode 0: OFF 1: ON
0: Invalid 1: Single-sided to duplex copying 2: Double-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Continuous feeding (by pressing the [START] button) 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray) 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time
Procedur e 1
2 1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 107
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Paper size selection for PPC EUR: SYS [OTHER] button FOLIO UC: COMP JPN: A5-R Local I/F time-out period PRT 6 SYS <1-50>
613
User interface
614
Network
615
General
Size information of main memory and page memory
ALL
-
SYS
617
User interface
Print setting without department code
ALL
1 <0-2>
SYS
618
User interface
Default setting when mixed size originals are set on RADF
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
619
Paper feeding
Time lag before Auto Job Start of bypass feeding
ALL
4 <0-10>
SYS
620
User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface
Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer) Department management setting (Scanner) Department management setting (List print) Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming
PPC
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
User interface
Rotation printing at the nonsorting
621 622 623 624 625
627
FAX PRT SCN PRT PPC
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-1>
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedur e
Press the icon on the LCD to select the size.
9
Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I/ F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. -50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Displays the sizes of the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. 0: Printed forcibly 1: Not printed 2: Deleted forcibly 0: Scanned as all in same size 1: Scanned as each original size Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: OFF 1: ON (Start printing when the scanning of each page is finished) 0: Not rotating 1: Rotating
1
2
1
1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 108
Code 628 629 633
634 636
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- User Direction priority of original PPC 0 SYS interface image <0-1> User Department management ALL 0 SYS interface setting <0-1> Releasing F200 service ALL 0 SYS Data <0-2> overwrite call kit User interface User interface
Inner receiving tray priority at Non-sort Mode Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) Time differences
ALL PPC
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS SYS
ALL
EUR: 24 UC: 40 JPN: 6 <0-47>
SYS
Date display format
ALL
SYS
User interface
Automatic Sorting Mode setting (RADF)
PPC
EUR:1 UC:2 JPN:0 <0-2> 2 <0-4>
User interface
Default setting of Sorter Mode
PPC
638
General
640
User interface
641
642
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <0-4>
SYS
SYS
Contents 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 2: 0: 1: 0: 1:
Automatic Portrait Invalid Valid Not used Board installed (GP-1050) Service call Normal Inner receiving tray ON OFF
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY 2: MM.DD.YYYY 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:
Invalid STAPLE SORT GROUP ROTATE SORT NON-SORT STAPLE SORT GROUP ROTATE SORT
Procedur e 1 1
2 1
1 1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 109 05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Correction of reproduction PPC 10 SYS ratio in editing copy <0-10>
645
User interface
646
User interface
Image position in editing
PPC
2 <0-3>
SYS
647
User interface User interface
Direction priority for date and time stamp printing Returning finisher tray when printing is finished
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
649
User interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
650
User interface User interface
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting Printing format setting for Time Stamp and Page Number
PPC
SYS
PPC
0 <0-1> 2 <0-3>
User interface User interface User interface
Cascade operation setting
PPC
Cascade operation setting
PRT
Direction priority for date and time stamp printing
PPC
648
651
652 653 657
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Contents Sets the reproduction ratio for the “X in 1” printing (including magazine sort) to the “Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio”. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% Sets the page pasted position for “X in 1” to the upper left corner/ center. 0: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Cornering 1: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Cornering 2: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Centering 3: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Centering 0: Short edge 1: Long edge Sets whether or not returning the finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical Hyphen (with page number) /Dropout (with date, time and page number) 0: OFF/OFF 1: ON/OFF 2: OFF/ON 3: ON/ON Note: Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Short edge 1: Long edge
Procedur e 1
1
1 1
1
1 1
1 1 1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 110 07/11
Code 658
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Auto Job Start setting for PRT 0 SYS bypass feed printing <0-1>
Contents
Procedur e 1
659
User interface
Auto Job start setting for bypass feed printing
PPC
1 <0-1>
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
ALL
SYS
0: Invalid1: Valid
1
662
General
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail Clearing of SMS partition
Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) 0: Invalid1:Valid
SYS
3
665
General
M/SYS all clearing
ALL
-
M/ SYS
666
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
667
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
669
General
System all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
670
General
ALL
-
SYS
671
User interface
HDD diagnostic menu display Size indicator
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Clears SMS partition. (Performs when the service call [F106] has occurred.) Initializes all the adjustment modesand the setting modes. Initializes the Electronic Filing. Initializes the shared folder. Initializes system NVRAM area. Display the HDD information 0: Invalid 1: Valid
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2
1
1
3
3 3 3 2 1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 111
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Initialization of department SYS management information
Code
Classification
672
General
673
General
Trial period setting
ALL
254 <1-60>
SYS
678
General
Setting of banner advertising display
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
679
General
ALL
-
SYS
680
General
ALL
-
SYS
681
General
Banner advertising display 1 Banner advertising display 2 Display of [BANNER MESSAGE] button
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
682
Use interface
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
Offsetting between jobs
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Initializing of the department management information * Key in the code and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, “Enter Department Code” is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. Sets the trial period from 1 to 60 days. This setting is effective only when the default value is "254". Once the default value is set, this value is only used for a reference. Sets whether or not displaying the banner advertising. The setting contents of 08-679 and 08-680 are displayed at the time display section on the right top of the screen. When both are set, each content is displayed alternately. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed * This button enables the entry of “Banner advertising display 1 (08-679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on the control panel. 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Procedur e 3
1
1
11 11 1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 112
Code
Classification
683
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Duplex printing setting ALL 1 SYS when coin controller is <0-1> used
684 685
General General
Rebuilding all databases Rebuilding all databases related to Address Book
ALL ALL
-
SYS SYS
686
General
ALL
-
SYS
689
FAX
Rebuilding all databases related to log Adaptation of paper source priority selection
FAX
0 <0-1>
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
HDD type display
ALL
<2> <0-2>
692
Maintenance
Performing panel calibration
ALL
-
SYS
693
General
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
-
SYS
694 695
General General
Performing HDD testing Sets when the end of trial period is notified.
ALL PRT/ SCN
3 <0-59>
SYS SYS
696
Scrambler board Paper feeding
Installation of scrambler board (Option)
ALL
0 <0-1>
-
Paper type priority
PPC
1 <1-2>
SYS
697
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
Contents When the duplex printing is short paid with a coin controller, reverse side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) Rebuilds all databases. Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book. Rebuilds all databases related to the logs. 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment 2: Normal formatting 0: Not formatted 1: Not used 2: Normal format Performs the calibration of the pressing position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. Returns the value to the factory shipping default value. Checks the bad sector. Sets when the end of trial period is notified. 0: On the day it ends 1 to 59: n days before 0: Not installed 1: Installed Sets the paper type priority during copying. 1: Plain paper 2: Thick paper 1
Procedur e 1
2
3 3
3 1
7 7
1
3
3 1
2
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 113
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Entering the key code for ALL scrambler board
698
Scrambler board
699
Scrambler board FAX
Erasing all data in HDD
ALL
-
-
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5 UC: 4 JPN: 0 Other: 1 <0-25>
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service function
ALL
2 <0-2>
SYS
703
Maintenance
ALL
-
707
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Remote-controlled service HTTP initially-registered server URL setting
ALL
710
Maintenance
Short time interval setting of recovery from Emergency Mode
ALL
https:// device.mf p-support.com: 443/ device/firstregist.ashx 24 <1-48>
711
Maintenance
Short time interval setting of Emergency Mode
ALL
701
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
60 <30-360>
Contents
Procedur e 5
SYS
Start up this code and have the user enter the key code. Once the key code has been set, this code cannot be set again on security grounds. This setting is effective only when the scrambler board is installed. 0: Japan 1: Asia 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong 4: U.S.A./Canada 5: Germany 6: U.K. 7: Italy 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid Maximum 256 Bytes
11
SYS
Maximum 256 Bytes
11
SYS
Sets the time interval to recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode. (Unit: Hour) Unit: Minute
1
SYS
3
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 114
Code
Classification
715
Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance Maintenance
720
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Remote-controlled service ALL 1230 SYS periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) ALL 0 SYS Remote-controlled service <0-1> Writing data of self-diagnostic code Remote-controlled service ALL 3 SYS response waiting time <1-30> (Timeout) Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS initial registration <0-2>
Remote-controlled service tentative password Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only) Service center call function
2 <0-2>
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF 1: Notifies all service calls 2: Notifies all but paper jams Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1 <0-1> -
SYS
ALL
729
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote)
HTTP proxy ID setting HTTP proxy password setting HTTP proxy panel display
738
739
1
ALL
HTTP proxy port number setting
734
0: OFF 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned Maximum 10 letters
2
Maintenance
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
1
0: Not registered 1: Registered
728
733
Unit: Minute
SYS
ALL
732
1
0 <0-1>
HTTP proxy IP address setting
731
0: Prohibited 1: Accepted
ALL
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
730
1
SYS
723
727
0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
-
Maintenance
726
Procedur e
ALL
721
Service center call HTTP server URL setting HTTP proxy setting
Contents
SYS
0: Valid 1: Invalid 000.000.000.000 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000)
SYS
11
11 1 11
1
ALL
0 <065535> -
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
1 <0-1> 3 <0-3>
SYS
0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
1
Automatic ordering function of supplies
ALL
Automatic ordering function of supplies FAX number Automatic ordering function of supplies E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name Automatic ordering function of supplies User's telephone number
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button
11
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
1
11
11
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 115
2
Code 740
741
742
743
744
Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
745
Maintenance (Remote)
746
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
747
748
758
759
760
761
762
763
765
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies User's E-mail address ALL SYS Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address ALL SYS Automatic ordering function of supplies Service number Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Service technician's name Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Service technician's telephone number Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Service technician's E-mail address Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Supplier's name Automatic ordering funcALL SYS tion of supplies Supplier's address ALL SYS Automatic ordering function of supplies Notes Information about supplies ALL SYS Part number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL 1 SYS Order quantity of toner car<1-99> tridge K ALL 1 SYS Information about supplies <1-99> Condition number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies ALL SYS Part number of toner bag
Contents
Procedur e
Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 5 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button
11
Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
11
Maximum 50 letters
11
Maximum 100 letters
11
Maximum 128 letters
11
Maximum 20 digits
11
1
1
Maximum 20 digits
11
Information about supplies Order quantity of toner bag
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
1
Information about supplies Condition number of toner bag Automatic ordering supplies Display
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
1
ALL
2 <0-2>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/ HTTP) 2: Invalid
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 116 07/11
Code 767
768
769
770
771
772
Classification Maintenance (Remote)
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Service Notification setting ALL 0 SYS <0-2>
Contents Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid (E-mail) 2: Valid (FAX) Maximum 192 letters
Procedur e 1
2
Destination E-mail address
ALL
-
SYS
11
Total counter information transmission setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
Total counter transmission date setting
ALL
1 <1-31>
SYS
1 to 31
1
PM counter notification setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
Dealer's name
ALL
-
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
-
SYS
Display setting of [Service Notification] button
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed
Sending error contents of equipment
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Destination E-mail address 2
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Destination E-mail address 3
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
773
Maintenance
774
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance
Notification format selection
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Text 1: Text + XML data
1
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-1
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
1
781
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
782
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-3
ALL
0 <0-31>
SYS
0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month
775
776
777
778
779
780
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
11
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 117
Code
Classification
783
Maintenance
784
Maintenance
785
Maintenance
786
Maintenance
787
Maintenance
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance Maintenance
790
794 795 796
797
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Remote-controlled service ALL 0 SYS polling day selection Day-4 <0-31>
Remote-controlled service polling day selection Sunday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Monday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Tuesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Wednesday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Thursday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Friday Remote-controlled service polling day selection Saturday Information of supplies setting of toner cartridge K Information of supplies setting of toner bag Remote-controlled service lengthened interval polling (End of month) Firmware download
ALL
Notifying address of trialperiod end
PRT/ SCN
Contents 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Procedur e 1
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
0: 1: 0: 1:
Invalid Valid Invalid Valid
1
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
Invalid Valid Invalid Valid Invalid Valid
ALL
ALL ALL ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS SYS SYS
798
Maintenance General
799
General
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/ SCN
-
SYS
826
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Toner saving mode)
PRT
128<0255>
M
840
Image control
Setting of toner density temperature control
ALL
0 <0-1>
M
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 <0-1> 3 <0-3>
SYS
SYS SYS
0: Accepted 1: Prohibited Sets where the end of the trial period is to be notified. 0: OFF 1: User 2: Service center 3: User and service center [CANCEL]: Cancel [EXECUTION]: Forcible end When the “Forcible end of trial period” is performed, “0” is set in the code (08-673) to end up the trial period forcibly. Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). 0: Controlled 1: Not controlled
1
1
1 1 1
1 1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 118
Code
Classification
841
Transfer
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Transfer timing correction ALL 0 M <0-7>
855
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor / Tab paper)
ALL
12 <0-14>
M
856
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Tab paper)
ALL
10 <0-15>
M
859
Developer
Developer bias DC correction(Toner saving mode)
PRT
128 <0-255>
M
860
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Normal)
PRT
128 <0-255>
M
861
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
862
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Text)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
863
Developer
Developer bias DC correction (Photo)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
864
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Normal)
PRT
128 <0-255>
M
865
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
866
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Text)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
867
Charger
Main charger bias correction (Photo)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
868
Transfer
Transfer charger bias correction (H)
ALL
128 <0-255>
M
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: Standard 1: Timing 1 2: Timing 2 3: Timing 3 4: Timing 4 5: Timing 5 6: Timing 6 7: Timing 7 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the developer bias adjustment (05-205). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the value of the main charger bias adjustment (05-210). Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the leading edge area of paper.
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 119
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Transfer charger bias corALL 84 M rection (L) <0-255>
Code
Classification
869
Transfer
872
Laser
Laser power correction (Normal)
PRT
128 <0-255>
M
873
Laser
Laser power correction (Text/Photo)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
875
Laser
Laser power correction (Toner saving mode)
PRT
128 <0-255>
M
876
Laser
Laser power correction (Text)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
877
Laser
Laser power correction (Photo)
PPC
128 <0-255>
M
900
Version
System firmware ROM version
ALL
-
-
903 905 907 908 915 916 920
Version Version Version Version Version Version Version
ALL ALL ALL ALL FAX ALL ALL
-
921 922
Version Version
ALL ALL
923
Version
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version
931
Version
933
Version
Engine ROM version Scanner ROM version RADF ROM version Finisher ROM version FAX board ROM version NIC board ROM version FROM basic section software version FROM internal program UI data fixed section version UI data common section version Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version of UI data language 5 in HDD Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version of UI data in FROM displayed at powerON Version of UI data language 7 in HDD Web data whole version
Contents
Procedur e
-
Corrects the transfer charger bias output value of the trailing edge area of paper. Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). Corrects the value of the laser power adjustment (05-286). JPN: T360SY0JXXX UC: T360SY0UXXX EUR: T360SY0EXXX Others: T360SY0XXXX 360M-XXX 360S-XXX DF-XXXX SDL-XX FIN-XX F562-XXX X.XXX VX.XX/X.XX
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-
-
VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X
2 2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 120
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 1 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 2 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 3 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 4 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 5 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 6 HD version ALL -
Code
Classification
934
Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
Version
945
Network
947
General
948
General
Mode setting by pressing [Energy Saver] button for a while
949
General
950
1 <1-2> -
UTY
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Automatic interruption page setting during black printing
ALL
0 <0-100>
SYS
Electronic filing
Start-up method of Electronic Filing
ALL
0 <0-3>
SYS
953
User interface
Access code entry for Electronic Filing printing
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
954
User interface
Clearing timing for files and Electronic Filing Agent
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
969
User interface User interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
Sound setting when switching to Energy Saving Mode
ALL
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1>
970
Two-way setting of RawPort 9100 Initialization after software version upgrade
ALL ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
-
SYS
Contents
Procedur e
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
VXXX.XXX X
2
JPN: T360HD0JXXX UC: T360HD0UXXX EUR: T360HD0EXXX Others: T360HD0XXXX 1: Valid 2: Invalid Perform this code when the software in this equipment has been upgraded. Sets the mode to enter when the [Energy Saver] button is pressed for a while.0: Sleep Mode1: Auto Shut Off Mode Sets the number of pages to interrupt the printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages Sets the start-up method of the Electronic Filing. 0: Standard 1: Forced start-up (Not recovered) 2: Forced start-up (Recovered) 3: Data update 0: Renewed automatically 1: Enter every time 0: Immediately after the completion of scanning 1: Cleared by Auto Clear 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON
2
2
12 3
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 121
Code
Classification
973
Network
975
General
976
Electronic Filing
977
Network
978
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PCL line feed code setting PRT 0 SYS <0-3>
Job handling when printing is short paid with coin controller
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
Equipment name setting to a folder when saving files
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
Switching of extended ASCII code in catFs filesystem Raw printing job (Paper feeding drawer)
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
PRT
0 <0-5>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Sets the PCL line feed code. 0: Automatic setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF 2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF 3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller. 0: Pause the job 1: Stop the job Sets whether or not adding the equipment name to the folder when saving files. 0: Not add 1: Add 0: ISO8859-1 1: ISO8859-2 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
AUTO Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 122
Code
Classification
979
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Raw printing job PRT 0 SYS (PCL symbol set) <0-39>
985
ElecPrint mode setting of mixed tronic Fil- input source of Electronic ing Filing
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
986
General
Copy function setting
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS
988
Paper feeding
Setting of paper size switching to 13" LG
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
989
Scrambler board
Scrambler board initial setting
ALL
-
-
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: 1: 2: 3: 4:
Roman-8 ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 PC-8,Code Page 437 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/ Norwegian 6: PC-850,Multilingual 7: PC-852, Latin2 8: PC-8 Turkish 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 12: DeskTop 13: PS Text 14: Ventura International 15: Ventura US 16: Microsoft Publishing 17: Math-8 18: PS Math 19: Ventura Math 20: Pi Font 21: Legal 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 23: ISO 6:ASCII 24: ISO 11 25: ISO 15: Italian 26: ISO 17 27: ISO 21: German 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29: ISO 69: French 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31: MC Text 32: PC Cyrillic 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35: PC-775 36: PC-1004 37: Symbol 38: Windows Baltic 39: Wingdings 0: Image quality priority mode 1: Function priority mode Sets the copy function to be invalid. 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Not switched 1: LG→13"LG 2: FOLIO→13"LG Performs the initial setting of the scrambler board.
Procedur e 1
2
1
1
1
3
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 123 04/10
Code
Classification
995
Version
999
1002
Maintenance Maintenance Network
1003
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Equipment number ALL 0 SYS (serial number) display <10 digits>
FSMS total counter
ALL
0 <8 digits> 3 <1-3> 1 <1-2>
SYS
Reset of NIC board
ALL
Selection of NIC board status information
ALL
Network
Speed setting of Ethernet
ALL
3 <1-3>
NIC
1004
Network
NIC Web password
ALL
-
NIC
1005
Network
Availability of IP
ALL
NIC
1006
Network
Address Mode
ALL
1 <1-2> 2 <1-5>
1007 1008
Network Network
Domain name IP address
ALL ALL
-
NIC NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
-
NIC
1010
Network
Gateway
ALL
-
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
NIC
1012
Network
Network frame type
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-5>
1013
Network
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
NIC
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-2>
1001
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
NIC NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Contents This code can be also keyed in from the adjustment mode (05976). 10 digits Refer to values of total counter. 1: Cold 2: Warm 3: Not reset 1: Not printed out when the equipment is restarted 2: Printed out when the equipment is restarted 1: 10 MBPS 2: 100 MBPS 3: Automatic Writing only (Current setting is not displayed.) Maximum 31 letters 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Fixed IP address 2: Dynamic IP address 3: Dynamic IP address without AutoIP 4: Dynamic IP address without BOOTP 5: Dynamic IP address without DHCP Maximum 96 letters 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Automatic 2: IEEE802.3 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3 SNAP 5: IEEE802.2 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available
Procedur e 11
1 12 12
12
12
12 12
12 12
12
12
12 12
12 12
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 124
Code
Classification
1015
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Zone setting of AppleTalk ALL * NIC
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1017
Network
Availability of DNS
ALL
1018
Network
IP address to DNS server (Primary)
1019
Network
1020
Contents
Procedur e
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> -
NIC
IP address to DNS server (Secondary)
ALL
-
NIC
Network
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1 <1-5>
NIC
1021
Network
Availability of SLP
ALL
NIC
1023 1024
Network Network
ALL ALL
UTY UTY
1025
Network
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
1026
Network
NetBios name Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary) Name of WINS server or IP address (Secondary) Availability of Bindery
1 <1-2> -
Maximum 32 letters *: Wildcard character 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 15 letters Maximum 128 letters
ALL
NIC
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028 1029 1030
Network Network Network
Directory service context Directory service tree Availability of HTTP server
ALL ALL ALL
1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 127 letters Maximum 47 letters 1: Available 2: Not available
12
1027
1031
Network
Port number to NIC HTTP server
ALL
1032
Network
Port number to system HTTP server
ALL
1033
Network
ALL
1034
Network
Availability of NIC HTTP client TCP port number to Controller HTTP client
1035
Network
IP address to HTTP server (Primary)
ALL
1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 80 <165535> 8080 <165535> 2 <1-2> 80 <165535> -
1037
Network
Availability of SMTP client
ALL
1038
Network
ALL
1039
Network
FQDN or IP address to SMTP server TCP port number of SMTP client
ALL
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 <1-2> 25 <165535>
NIC NIC
NIC NIC NIC NIC
12 12
2 12 12
12
12
12 12 12
12 12 12 12
NIC
12
SYS
1
NIC
1: Available 2: Not available
UTY
NIC
NIC NIC NIC
12 12
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes
12
12 12 12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 125
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Availability of SMTP server ALL 1 UTY <1-2> TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 UTY server <165535> E-mail box name to SMTP ALL UTY server Availability of Offramp ALL 2 UTY <1-2> Offramp security ALL 1 UTY <1-2> Printing at Offramp ALL 1 UTY <1-2> Availability of POP3 clients ALL 1 NIC <1-2> FQDN or IP address to ALL NIC POP3 server Types of POP3 server ALL 1 NIC <1-3>
Code
Classification
1040
Network
1041
Network
1042
Network
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050 1051
Network Network
1052
Network
1053
Network
Availability of FTP client
ALL
1054
Network
ALL
1055
Network
FQDN or IP address to FTP server TCP port number of FTP client
1056
Network
Data port number of FTP client
ALL
1057 1058
Network Network
ALL ALL
1059
Network
Login name to FTP server Login password to FTP server Availability of FTP server
1060
Network
TCP port number of FTP server
ALL
1061 1062
Network Network
ALL ALL
1063
Network
Login name to FTP client Login password to FTP client MIB function
1065 1066
Network Network
Login name to POP3 server Login password to POP3 E-mail reception interval (Unit: Minute) TCP port number of POP3 client
Setting of read Community Setting of read/Write Community
ALL
-
NIC
ALL ALL
5 <0-4096> 110 <165535> 1 <1-2> -
NIC NIC
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
21 <165535> 0 <065535> 1 <1-2> 21 <165535> 1 <1-2> public private
Contents 1: Available 2: Not available
NIC
12 12
Maximum 192 letters
12
1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes
12
1: Automatic 2: POP3 3: APOP Maximum 96 letters Maximum 96 letters
NIC
NIC
Procedur e
12 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12
1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 letters
12 12
UTY
12
UTY
12
SYS SYS
Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
11 11
NIC
1: Available 2: Not available
12
UTY
12
SYS SYS
Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
11 11
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
12
NIC NIC
12 12
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 126 05/05
Code
Classification
1067
Network
1068
Network
1069
Network
1070
Network
1073
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Authentication TRAP funcALL 1 NIC tion <1-2> ALERTS TRAP function ALL 1 NIC <1-2> TRAP destination IP ALL UTY address
Contents 1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Maximum 31 letters
Procedur e 12 12
2 12
ALL
public
NIC
Network
Community setting of TRAP (via IP) Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
NIC
1074
Network
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
1075
Network
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1076
Network
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
1077 1078
Network Network
LPD queue name Availability of IPP
ALL ALL
1079
Network
ALL
1080
Network
Availability of IPP port number “80” TCP port number of IPP
1081 1082 1083 1084
Network Network Network Network
ALL ALL ALL ALL
1 <1-2> 9100 <165535> 1 <1-2> 515 <165535> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 631 <165535> -
NIC NIC NIC NIC
Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters
12 12 12 12
1085
Network
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
1086
Network
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
1087
Network
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
1088
Network
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
1089
Network
ALL
NIC
Network Network
1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
12
1090 1091
1 <1-2> print -
1092
Network
1093
Network
1094
Network
IPP printer name IPP printer location IPP printer information IPP printer information (more) Installer of IPP printer driver IPP printer “Make and Model” IPP printer information (more) MFGR IPP message from operator Availability of FTP print
ALL
Printer user name of FTP Printer user password of FTP TCP port number to FTP print server
ALL ALL
Login name to Novell print server Login password to Novell print server
1: Valid 2: Invalid
NIC
NIC
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid
12 12
Maximum 31 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid
NIC
NIC NIC
12 12
NIC
NIC NIC
12
12 12 12 12
12 12
NIC
ALL
21 <165535> -
NIC
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
12
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 127 05/05
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Name of SearchRoot ALL NIC server Scan rate setting of print ALL 5 NIC queue <1-255> ALL 5 UTY Page number limitation for <1-99> printing text of received Email MDN return mail setting ALL 2 UTY when receiving E-mail <1-2> Trap destination of IPX ALL UTY
Code
Classification
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
1099
Network
1100
Network
Method of SMTP server authentication
ALL
5 <1-5>
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
-
1102
Network
ALL
1103
Network
Login name for SMTP server authentication Login password for SMTP server authentication Rendezvous setting
ALL
1104
Network
Link local host name
ALL
1105
Network
Service name setting
ALL
1107 1108
Network Network
1109 1110
Network Network
1111
Network
FTP server login name 1 FTP server login password 1 FTP server login name 2 FTP server login password 2 POP Before SMTP setting
ALL
1112
Network
Host name
ALL
1114
Network
ALL
1117
Network
Sending mail text of InternetFAX SMB time-out period
Contents
Procedur e
Maximum 31 letters
12
Unit: Second
12 12
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 24 letters (Valid from 0 to 9 and from A to F) 1: Plain 2: Login 3: Cram-MD5 4: Digest MD5 5: Disable Maximum 64 letters
12
-
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1 <1-2> MFP_ serial Refer to contents
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL ALL
Tiger Woods
ALL ALL
Shigeki Maruyam a 2 <1-2> MFP_ serial 1 <0-1> 300 <1-9999>
ALL
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
NIC NIC
12 12
12
12 12
UTY UTY
Maximum 63 letters e-STUDIO350: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO350 e-STUDIO450: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO450 Maximum 64 letters Maximum 32 letters
12 12
UTY UTY
Maximum 64 letters Maximum 32 letters
12 12
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 63 letters
12
NIC SYS SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid Unit: Second
12 1 1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 128 05/05
Code
Classification
1120
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Backup/Restore of NIC ALL 0 SYS setting information <0-1>
0: Read (Reads all of the setting information in NIC and create a file NAM1B (no extension) in USB) 1: Write (Writes all of the setting information read from a file NAM1B (no extension) in USB) Maximum 15 letters
12
Sets the Job Build Function. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets the maximum number of time a job build has been performed. 5-1000: 5 to 1000 times Selects the default screen when entering the User Function menu by pressing the [USER FUNCTIONS] button. 0: ADDRESS 1: COUNTER 1: LCF 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer
1
2
Network
Workgroup name
ALL
1130
User interface
Job Build Function
ALL
1131
User interface
Maximum number of time job build performed
ALL
1000 <5-1000>
SYS
1132
General
Default screen selection of the User Function menu
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
1135
Paper feeding
Default setting of drawers (Printer/BOX)
PRT
1 <1-5>
SYS
1136
Network
ALL
13 <0-16>
SYS
1137
Network
ALL
8-20 M bytes
1
Network
12 <8-20> 0 <0-3>
SYS
1138
Number of lines simultaneously connectable when using SMB Memory partition size when using Samba LDAP search method setting
SYS
1
1139
Network
ALL
User interface
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
1140
LDAP authentication setting Restriction of the template function with the administrator privilege
Sets the search method when performing a LDAP search. 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Suffix match 3: Full match 0: Not authenticated 1: Authenticated Selects the restriction of the template function usage setting. 0: No restriction 1: Only available with the administrator privilege.
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
UTY
Procedur e
1124
ALL
workgroup 1 <0-1>
Contents
SYS
SYS
12
1
1
1
1
1 1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 129 05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Counter notification ALL SYS Remote FAX setting
1145
Maintenance (Remote)
1372
Image processing
Heater and energizing time accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1376
Image processing Image processing
Toner cartridge drive counter Number of output pages Number of output pages (Thick paper 1)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1386
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1387
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 3)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1388
Image processing
Number of output pages (OHP film)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1390
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (upper drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1391
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (lower drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1385
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Maximum 32 digits Enter a hyphen with the [MONITOR/PAUSE] button. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (when power of the equipment is ON) but does not count at the Sleep Mode. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode. Counts the rotation number of the toner cartridge. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at the PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer.
Procedur e 11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 130 05/05
1392
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Feeding retry counter ALL 0 M (PFP upper drawer) <8 digits>
1393
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (PFP lower drawer)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1394
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (bypass feed)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1395
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (LCF)
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1396
Paper feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1397
Paper feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1398
Paper feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1399
Paper feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1400
Paper feeding
ALL
0 <8 digits>
M
1
1401
ALL
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
M
1
1410
Paper feeding Counter
Feeding retry counter upper limit value (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (LCF) Counter for period of toner cartridge rotation time
1412
Counter
Code
Classification
Counter for tab paper
ALL
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 <8 digits>
M
M
Contents Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1390 to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.
Counts up the period of rotation time of the toner cartridge. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser roller is reset, this counter is reset in sync at the PM support mode.
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 131 05/05
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- HDD data overwriting type ALL 3 SYS setting <0-4>
1422
Data overwrite kit
1424
Data overwrite kit
HDD data clearing type setting (forcible clearing)
ALL
3 <0-4>
SYS
1426
Data overwrite kit
Forcible HDD data clearing
ALL
-
-
1427
Data overwrite kit
Forcible NVRAM data all clearing
ALL
-
-
1428
Data overwrite kit
Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents HDD data is cleared by overwriting the type of value set in this code. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed.) 0: "00" overwriting only 1: "FF" overwriting only 2: Random number overwriting only 3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation ON) 4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation OFF) HDD data is cleared by overwriting the type of value set in this code. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed.) 0: "00" overwriting only 1: "FF" overwriting only 2: Random number overwriting only 3: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation ON) 4: "00" + "FF" + random number overwriting (validation OFF) HDD data is cleared in the procedure set in 081424. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed. When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed. When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1050 is installed.
Procedur e 1
1
3
3
3
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 132 05/05
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Mode only for Private Print ALL 0 SYS <0-1>
Code
Classification
1432
Network
1433
Network
"Disable e-Filing" function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1434
Network
"Disabling local file save" function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1484
Network
Authentication method of "Scan to Email"
ALL
0 <0-2>
SYS
1485
Network
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1486
Network
Setting whether use of Internet FAX is permitted or not when it is given an authenticationn Server setting for LDAP user authentication
ALL
SYS
1487
Network
"From" address assignment method when it is given an authentication
ALL
0 <04294967 295> 0 <0-2>
1488
Network
ID setting of LDAP server for "From" address assignment
ALL
SYS
1489
Network
ALL
1491
Network
Setting for "From" address edit at "Scan to Email" E-mail domain name
0 <04294967 295> 0 <0-1> -
ALL
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS SYS
Contents 0: Normal mode 1: Mode for Private Print 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) 0: Disabled 1: SMTP authentication 2: LDAP authentication 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted
Procedur e 1
1
1
1
1
2
0: "User name" + @ + "Domain name" 1: LDAP searching 2: Use the address registered at "From" field of E-mail setting
1
2
0: Not permitted 1: Permitted 96 + 2 (delimiter) character ASCll sequence only
1 11
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 133 05/05
2
<>(Chap. 2.2.9)
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Standard paper size setting ALL EUR: 0 SYS UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1>
1500
Pixel counter
1501
Pixel counter
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1502
Pixel counter
Service technician reference counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1503
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge reference counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1504
Pixel counter
Pixel counter display setting
ALL
1 <0-1>
SYS
1505
Pixel counter
Displayed reference setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1506
Pixel counter
Toner empty determination counter setting
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1507
Pixel counter
Threshold setting for toner empty determination (Output pages)
ALL
400 <0-999>
SYS
1508
Pixel counter
Threshold setting for toner empty determination (Pixel counter)
ALL
17550 <060000>
SYS
1509
Pixel counter
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS
1510
Pixel counter
Pixel counter clear flag/ Service technician reference Service technician reference cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1514
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1518
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge reference count started date
ALL
-
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Procedur e
Selects the standard paper size to convert it into the pixel count (%). 0: A4 1: LT Clears all information related to the pixel counter. Clears all information related to the service technician reference pixel counter. Clears all information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. Selects whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed Selects the reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference1: Toner cartridge reference Selects the counter to determine toner empty. 0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter Sets the number of output pages to determine toner empty. This setting is valid when “0” is set at 08-1506. Sets the number of output pages to determine toner empty. This setting is valid when “1” is set at 08-1506. Becomes “1” when 081502 is performed.
1
Displays the date on which 08-1502 was performed. Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed.
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 134 05/12
Code 1548
Classification Pixel counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of output pages PPC <8 digits> SYS (Service technician reference)
1550
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Service technician reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1551
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Service technician reference)
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1553
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
<8 digits>
SYS
1555
Pixel counter
Number of output pages/ black (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1556
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1566
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge replacement counter
ALL
<3 digits>
SYS
1592
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Service technician reference)
PPC
0 <010000>
SYS
1593
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Service technician reference)
PRT
0 <010000>
SYS
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge replacement. Displays the average pixel count in the copy function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur e 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 135
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Average pixel count FAX 0 SYS (Service technician refer<0ence) 10000>
1594
Pixel counter
1595
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Service technician reference)
PPC/ PRT/ FAX
0 <010000>
SYS
1606
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)
PPC
0 <010000>
SYS
1607
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)
PRT
0 <010000>
SYS
1608
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)
FAX
0 <010000>
SYS
1613
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0 <010000>
SYS
1619
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
0 <010000>
SYS
1624
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC/ PRT/ FAX
0 <010000>
SYS
1625
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
0 <010000>
SYS
1634
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
0 <010000>
SYS
1639
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0 <010000>
SYS
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents Displays the average pixel count in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy/ printer/FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function, and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy/ printer/FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Procedur e 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 136
Code 1640
Classification Pixel counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Latest pixel count PRT 0 SYS (Toner cartridge reference) <010000>
1649-0 1649-1 1649-2 1649-3 1649-4 1649-5 1649-6 1649-7 1649-8 1649-9
Pixel counter
Pixel count distribution
1650-0 1650-1 1650-2 1650-3 1650-4 1650-5 1650-6 1650-7 1650-8 1650-9
Pixel counter
Pixel count distribution
1651-0 1651-1 1651-2 1651-3 1651-4 1651-5 1651-6 1651-7 1651-8 1651-9
Pixel counter
Pixel count distribution
0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100%
Contents Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy function are displayed. [Unit: page]
Procedur e 2
2 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC
<8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits>
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT
<8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits>
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed. [Unit: page]
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX
<8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits> <8 digits>
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed. [Unit: page]
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 137 05/11
<> • The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. 0: Present number of output pages - Means the present number of output pages. 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement - Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement. 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement - Means the number of output pages at the last replacement. 3: Present driving counts - Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds). 4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced - Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds). 5: Driving counts at the last replacement - Means the drive counts at the last replacement. 6: Present output pages for control - Means the present number of output pages for controlling. 7: Present driving counts for control - Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds). 8: Number of times replaced - Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen. Notes: • Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. • When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. • When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to "0". PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits 1150-0 to 8
Date of previous replacement 1151
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
Drum separation finger
1172-0 to 8
1173
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
Items Photoconductive drum
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 138 05/12
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
Transfer charger wire
1214-0 to 8
1215
Separation charger wire
1224-0 to 8
1225
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
Cleaning roller
1266-0 to 8
1267
Fuser roller separation finger
1268-0 to 8
1269
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1287
Items
Pickup roller (RADF)
Feed roller (RADF)
Separation roller (RADF)
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 220000/220000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 139 05/12
2
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Pickup roller (Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1291
Pickup roller (Lower drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
Pickup roller (LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
Feed roller (Upper drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
Feed roller (Lower drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1303
Separation roller (Upper drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
Separation roller (Lower drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
Separation roller (LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
Separation roller (Bypass unit)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
Items
Feed roller (LCF)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 140 05/12
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Feed roller (Bypass unit)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1333
Items
Pickup roller (Bypass unit)
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 141 05/12
2
<> (1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. (2) Key in the code “257” and press the [START] button (the following is displayed). Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
(3)
Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button. The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed. Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] button.) •
Key in “1” to copy the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
(B)
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 142 05/12
•
Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(B)
2
(4)
Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the [CANCEL] button is pressed.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 143 05/12
2.2.8
Setting mode (08) (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][8] [POWER]
[START]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
[ENTER] or [Digital key] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 144 07/11
Procedure 5 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] *[HELP] Sets or changes value
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
2
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Setting)
[ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 9 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] [ENTER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Digital key] (2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] or [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 145 05/12
Procedure 14 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Adjustment value cannot be changed
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. 2. e-STUDIO352/353/452/453: In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. "M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS", "NIC" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
202
User interface
203
General
204
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Date and time setting ALL Year/month/date/day/ <13 dighour/minute/second its> Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 “Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from “1” to “6”. M 0: EUR Destination selection ALL EUR: 0 UC: 1 1: UC JPN: 2 2: JPN <0-2> Counter installed externally ALL 0 M 0: No external counter <0-3> 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card (This value is valid only when “2” is set to 08-201.) 3: Key copy counter Line adjustment mode ALL 0 M 0: For factory ship<0-1> ment 1: For line * Field: “0” must be selected Auto-clear timer setting ALL 3 SYS Timer to return the <0-10> equipment to the default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec.
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 5
1
1
1
1
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 146 07/11
Code 205
Classification User interface
206
User interface
207
User interface
209
User interface
210
Paper feeding
213
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default ProFunc- 1 Auto power save mode ALL JPN: 6 SYS Timer to automatically timer setting Other: 11 switch to the Auto <0, 6-15> power save mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. 1 SYS Timer to turn OFF the Auto Shut Off Mode timer ALL Refer to setting (Auto Shut Off content power or to enter the Mode / Sleep Mode) <0-20> Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min.11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17:180min. 18: 210min. 19:240min. 20: Not used e-STUDIO352/353 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 9 Others: 9 e-STUDIO452/453 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 12 Others: 12 Highlighting display on ALL 0 SYS 0: Black letter on white 1 LCD <0-1> background 1: White letter on black background 1 Default setting of filing forALL 1 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) mat when E-mailing <0-6> 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single) Paper size (A6-R) PRT 148/105 M 10 feeding/width wise direc<148tion 432/105297> Display of [REVERSE ALL 0 SYS 0: Not displayed 1 ORDER] button <0-1> 1: Displayed
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 147 07/11
2
Code
Classification
219
User interface
220
User interface
221
User interface
224
Paper feeding Paper feeding
225
226
Paper feeding
227
Paper feeding
228
Paper feeding
229
Paper feeding
230
Paper feeding
231
Paper feeding
232
Paper feeding
233
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of filing forSCN 0 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) mat when storing files <0-6> 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single) Language displayed at ALL EUR: 0 SYS 0: Language 1 power-ON UC: 0 1: Language 2 JPN: 5 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 <0-6> 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Language selection in UI ALL EUR: 0 SYS 0: Language 1 data at Web power ON UC: 0 1: Language 2 JPN: 5 2: Language 3 <0-6> 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 Paper size for bypass feed PPC UNDEF SYS Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Paper size for upper ALL EUR: A4 M Press the button on the drawer UC: LT LCD to select the size. JPN: A4 M Press the button on the Paper size for lower ALL EUR: A3 LCD to select the size. drawer UC: LD JPN: A3 Paper size for PFP upper ALL EUR: M Press the button on the drawer A4-R LCD to select the size. UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R Paper size for PFP lower ALL EUR: A4 M Press the button on the drawer UC: LG LCD to select the size. JPN: B4 ALL 420/297 M Paper size (A3) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 297/210 M Paper size (A4-R) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 210/148 M Paper size (A5-R) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 364/257 M Paper size (B4) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 257/182 M Paper size (B5-R) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297>
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedur e 1
1
1
9 9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 148 07/11
Code
Classification
234
Paper feeding
235
Paper feeding
236
Paper feeding
237
Paper feeding
238
Paper feeding
239
Paper feeding
240
Paper feeding
241
Paper feeding
242
Paper feeding
243
Paper feeding
244
Paper feeding
245
Paper feeding
247
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Paper size (LT-R) ALL 279/216 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (LD) ALL 432/279 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (LG) ALL 356/216 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (ST-R) ALL 216/140 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 330/210 M Paper size (FOLIO) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 330/216 M Paper size (13”LG) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 216/216 M Paper size (8.5”X8.5”) <182feeding/width wise direc432/140tion 297> ALL 432/279 SYS Paper size (Non-standard) <148feeding/width wise direc432/105tion 297> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper Memory 1 <148size of bypass feed Paper size (bypass feed432/100(non-standard type) into ing/non-standard type) 297> [MEMORY 1]. feeding/width wise direction Paper size (8K) ALL 390/270 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> Paper size (16K-R) ALL 270/195 M feeding/width wise direc<182tion 432/140297> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper Memory 2 <148size of bypass feed Paper size (bypass feed432/100(non-standard type) into ing/non-standard type) 297> [MEMORY 2]. feeding/width wise direction
© 2003 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedur e 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
e-STUDIO350/352/450/452 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 149 07/11
2
Code
Classification
248
Paper feeding
249
Paper feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
252
Maintenance
253
Maintenance Paper feeding
254
255
Paper feeding
256
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func-